《小空经》的注释巴利
1. Cūḷasuññatasuttavaṇṇanā
176 这部《小空经》以“如是我闻”开头。其中“有一次”这句话的背景是这样的:据说,那位长老侍奉完世尊之后,回到自己白天休息的地方,定好时间,进入以涅槃为所缘的空果定,坐下来安住,到了预定的时间就出定。那时,诸行以空的方式呈现在他面前,他就生起了想听空相关教导的念头。当时他心里想:“我不能像用车辕去撞车辕那样冒失,直接跑去对世尊说:‘尊者,请为我说空相关的法。’不如我提起世尊以前住在那个小镇时对我说过的一段话,这样世尊就会为我说空相关的法了。”于是他这样提醒十力者,说出了“有一次”等话。巴利
176.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷasuññatasuttaṃ. Tattha ekamidanti thero kira bhagavato vattaṃ katvā attano divāṭṭhānaṃ gantvā kālaparicchedaṃ katvā nibbānārammaṇaṃ suññatāphalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisinno yathāparicchedena vuṭṭhāsi. Athassa saṅkhārā suññato upaṭṭhahiṃsu. So suññatākathaṃ sotukāmo jāto. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘na kho pana sakkā dhurena dhuraṃ paharantena viya gantvā ‘suññatākathaṃ me, bhante, kathethā’ti bhagavantaṃ vattuṃ, handāhaṃ yaṃ me bhagavā nagarakaṃ upanissāya viharanto ekaṃ kathaṃ kathesi, taṃ sāremi, evaṃ me bhagavā suññatākathaṃ kathessatī’’ti dasabalaṃ sārento ekamidantiādimāha.
这里,“id”只是一个语气助词。长老能于一句上住立而受持六万句,怎么会连“以空住”这一句都记不住呢?他确实想听,但像知道的人那样提问,这样并不合适。他是想听被讲得清楚明白、详细展开的空论,因为想听,才装作不知道的样子这样问。其实,就算不知道的人,也能装得像知道一样。长老何必做这种伪装呢?他是在自己本来就知道的情况下,为了向世尊表达恭敬,才说出“或许这……”这样的话。巴利
Tattha idanti nipātamattameva. Kaccimetaṃ, bhanteti thero ekapade ṭhatvā saṭṭhipadasahassāni uggahetvā dhāretuṃ samattho, kiṃ so ‘‘suññatāvihārenā’’ti ekaṃ padaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkhissati, sotukāmena pana jānantena viya pucchituṃ na vaṭṭati, pākaṭaṃ katvā vitthāriyamānaṃ suññatākathaṃ sotukāmo ajānanto viya evamāha. Eko ajānantopi jānanto viya hoti, thero evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ kiṃ karissati, attano jānanaṭṭhānepi bhagavato apacitiṃ dassetvā ‘‘kaccimeta’’ntiādimāha.
“过去也是”指最初成道时,依止那揭罗迦城而住的时期。“现在也是”指如今。这样说了之后,他心想:“阿难想听空性之论。可是有的人能听,却不能受持;有的人既能听也能受持,却不能讲说;而阿难既能听,也能受持,还能讲说。我要为他说空性之论。”于是他讲说时,说了“譬如”等话。其中,“空于象、牛、马、母马”是指:那里有以木材、布片、彩绘等方式做成的象等;也有在多闻天王、顶生王等住处,以彩绘工艺画成的;也有作为宝物装饰,设置在窗户、门闩、床座、椅子等上面的;也有为了修补旧物而存放的金银;还有以木材等形式做成的男女像,以及为了听法、提问等而来的男女。因此,那里并非没有这些。所谓“空”,是指没有那些系属于诸根、有知觉的象等,没有在想要受用时可以随意受用的金银,也没有常住在那里的男女。巴利
Pubbepīti paṭhamabodhiyaṃ nagarakaṃ upanissāya viharaṇakālepi. Etarahipīti idānipi. Evaṃ pana vatvā cintesi – ‘‘ānando suññatākathaṃ sotukāmo, eko pana sotuṃ sakkoti, na uggahetuṃ, eko sotumpi uggahetumpi sakkoti, na kathetuṃ, ānando pana sotumpi sakkoti uggahetumpi kathetumpi, (kathemissa) suññatākatha’’nti. Iti taṃ kathento seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha suñño hatthigavāssavaḷavenāti tattha kaṭṭharūpapotthakarūpacittarūpavasena katā hatthiādayo atthi, vessavaṇamandhātādīnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhāne cittakammavasena katampi, ratanaparikkhatānaṃ vātapānadvārabandhamañcapīṭhādīnaṃ vasena saṇṭhitampi, jiṇṇapaṭisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ ṭhapitampi jātarūparajataṃ atthi, kaṭṭharūpādivasena katā dhammasavanapañhapucchanādivasena āgacchantā ca itthipurisāpi atthi, tasmā na so tehi suñño. Indriyabaddhānaṃ saviññāṇakānaṃ hatthiādīnaṃ, icchiticchitakkhaṇe paribhuñjitabbassa jātarūparajatassa, nibaddhavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ itthipurisānañca abhāvaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
“缘比丘僧团”是说:即使比丘们已经进村乞食,也还有比丘在接受僧房里的饭食,还有生病的比丘、照顾病人的比丘、负责诵经和做衣等事务的比丘,所以那个地方并不是空无一人的。正因为比丘们始终在那里存在,才这样说。“单一”是指一个整体,也就是一个不空的状态,意思是存在一种不空的情形。“不作意”就是不在心里留意、不转向它、不反复察看它。“村想”就是由于“村”这个名称而产生的想,或者由烦恼而产生的想。“人想”也是这样。“缘林想而作意单一”是说:这是树林、这是树、这是山、这是青翠的丛林,就这样只依着树林来作意林想。“投入”就是进入其中。“胜解”就是这样确定下来。“那些热恼”是指那些因为村想而可能生起的运转热恼或烦恼热恼,在这里因为林想而不存在了。第二句也是这样。“然而,这种热恼还存在”是说:只依着林想而生起的那一点运转热恼,还是存在的。巴利
Bhikkhusaṅghaṃ paṭiccāti bhikkhūsu hi piṇḍāya paviṭṭhesupi vihārabhattaṃ sādiyantehi bhikkhūhi ceva gilānagilānupaṭṭhākauddesacīvarakammapasutādīhi ca bhikkhūhi so asuññova hoti, iti niccampi bhikkhūnaṃ atthitāya evamāha. Ekattanti ekabhāvaṃ, ekaṃ asuññataṃ atthīti attho. Eko asuññabhāvo atthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Amanasikaritvāti citte akatvā anāvajjitvā apaccavekkhitvā. Gāmasaññanti gāmoti pavattavasena vā kilesavasena vā uppannaṃ gāmasaññaṃ. Manussasaññāyapi eseva nayo. Araññasaññaṃ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattanti idaṃ araññaṃ, ayaṃ rukkho, ayaṃ pabbato, ayaṃ nīlobhāso vanasaṇḍoti evaṃ ekaṃ araññaṃyeva paṭicca araññasaññaṃ manasi karoti. Pakkhandatīti otarati. Adhimuccatīti evanti adhimuccati. Ye assu darathāti ye ca pavattadarathā vā kilesadarathā vā gāmasaññaṃ paṭicca bhaveyyuṃ, te idha araññasaññāya na santi. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Atthi cevāyanti ayaṃ pana ekaṃ araññasaññaṃ paṭicca uppajjamānā pavattadarathamattā atthi.
在那里不存在的,是指:如同鹿子母讲堂里没有象等一样,在这林想之中,由村想和人想所生起、正在运作的热恼与烦恼热恼,是不存在的。在那里还剩下的,是指:如同鹿子母讲堂里有比丘僧团一样,在那里,由林想所生起、仅仅还在运作的热恼,是还剩下的。他清楚地知道这个还存在的确实存在,也就是如实知道那确实存在的东西——“这是存在的”;这就是进入空,也就是空的成就。巴利
Yañhikho tattha na hotīti yaṃ migāramātupāsāde hatthiādayo viya imissā araññasaññāya gāmasaññāmanussasaññāvasena uppajjamānaṃ pavattadarathakilesadarathajātaṃ, taṃ na hoti. Yaṃ pana tattha avasiṭṭhanti yaṃ migāramātupāsāde bhikkhusaṅgho viya tattha araññasaññāya pavattadarathamattaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti. Taṃ santamidaṃ atthīti pajānātīti taṃ vijjamānameva ‘‘atthi ida’’nti pajānāti, suññatāvakkantīti suññatānibbatti.
177 不作意人想:在这里,他不执取村落想。为什么呢?据说他心里这样盘算:“用人想去掉村落想,用林想去掉人想,用地想去掉林想,用空无边处想去除地想……乃至用非想非非想处想去除无所有处想,用观去除非想非非想处想,用道去除观,这样一步步把究竟空寂显示出来。”所以他就这样开始说法。其中,地想:为什么舍弃林想而作意地想呢?因为靠林想不能证得殊胜的境界。好比有人看见一块可爱的田地,心想:“这里种的稻谷等会长得很好,我会得到大利益”,就算他反复七次盯着那块田地看,稻谷也不会长好;但如果他把那块地上的树桩、荆棘清理干净,耕犁之后播下种子,这样才会长好。同样,就算七次作意“这是林,这是树,这是山,这是青翠的丛林”这样的林想,也既达不到近行定,也达不到安止定;而如果以地遍作为常修的业处,作地遍的遍作之后,生起诸禅那,再以禅那为近因增长观,就能够证得阿拉汉。因此,他舍弃林想而作意地想。缘:指由缘所生。巴利
177.Amanasikaritvāmanussasaññanti idha gāmasaññaṃ na gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘manussasaññāya gāmasaññaṃ nivattetvā, araññasaññāya manussasaññaṃ, pathavīsaññāya araññasaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanasaññāya pathavīsaññaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ , vipassanāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasaññaṃ, maggena vipassanaṃ nivattetvā anupubbena accantasuññataṃ nāma dassessāmī’’ti. Tasmā evaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha pathavīsaññanti kasmā araññasaññaṃ pahāya pathavīsaññaṃ manasi karoti? Araññasaññāya visesānadhigamanato. Yathā hi purisassa ramaṇīyaṃ khettaṭṭhānaṃ disvā – ‘‘idha vuttā sāliādayo suṭṭhu sampajjissanti, mahālābhaṃ labhissāmī’’ti sattakkhattumpi khettaṭṭhānaṃ olokentassa sāliādayo na sampajjanteva, sace pana taṃ ṭhānaṃ vihatakhāṇukakaṇṭakaṃ katvā kasitvā vapati, evaṃ sante sampajjanti, evameva – ‘‘idaṃ araññaṃ, ayaṃ rukkho, ayaṃ pabbato, ayaṃ nīlobhāso vanasaṇḍo’’ti sacepi sattakkhattuṃ araññasaññaṃ manasi karoti, nevūpacāraṃ na samādhiṃ pāpuṇāti, pathavīsaññāya panassa dhuvasevanaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ parikammaṃ katvā jhānāni nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānampi vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sakkā arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Tasmā araññasaññaṃ pahāya pathavīsaññaṃ manasi karoti. Paṭiccāti paṭicca sambhūtaṃ.
现在,为了用譬喻说明他是在哪一种地遍上成为“地想者”,世尊说了“譬如”等话。其中,“牛皮的”是指牛王的皮。其他普通牛的皮会有疮疤,也会有鞭痕。那些牛的皮拉展开来后不会平整无皱,而牛王因为具足好相,没有这些缺陷,所以取用的是它的皮。“以百钉”就是用一百根桩子。“善彻底张好”是指拉开之后绷得很平整。因为用不到一百根桩子撑开的皮会有皱,而用一百根桩子撑开的皮就像鼓面一样平整无皱,所以这样说。“高低不平”是指高地和低洼处,即高起的地方和凹陷的地方。“河与难行处”是指河流和难以通行的地方。“缘地想而作意于单一”是指只缘取地遍,并作意由缘彼所生的那单一的想。“唯余热恼”是指从此处开始,在一切段落中,皆应依所转起的热恼而理解为唯余热恼。巴利
Idāni yasmiṃ pathavīkasiṇe so pathavīsaññī hoti, tassa opammadassanatthaṃ seyyathāpītiādimāha. Tattha usabhassa etanti āsabhaṃ. Aññesaṃ pana gunnaṃ gaṇḍāpi honti pahārāpi. Tesañhi cammaṃ pasāriyamānaṃ nibbalikaṃ na hoti, usabhassa lakkhaṇasampannatāya te dosā natthi. Tasmā tassa cammaṃ gahitaṃ. Saṅkusatenāti khilasatena. Suvihatanti pasāretvā suṭṭhu vihataṃ. Ūnakasatasaṅkuvihatañhi nibbalikaṃ na hoti, saṅkusatena vihataṃ bheritalaṃ viya nibbalikaṃ hoti. Tasmā evamāha. Ukkūlavikkūlanti uccanīcaṃ thalaṭṭhānaṃ ninnaṭṭhānaṃ. Nadīvidugganti nadiyo ceva duggamaṭṭhānañca. Pathavīsaññaṃ paṭicca manasi karoti ekattanti kasiṇapathaviyaṃyeva paṭicca sambhūtaṃ ekaṃ saññaṃ manasi karoti. Darathamattāti ito paṭṭhāya sabbavāresu pavattadarathavasena darathamattā veditabbā.
182 182.“无相心定”指的是观禅的心定。因为它远离了常相等等相,所以称为“无相”。“即以此身”是在指出观禅的所依处。其中,“即以此”就是指这个四大所成的身体。“与六处相应”是指与六处相关联。“依命根”是说:只要命根还在运转,就依着命根而有转起(的现象),仅仅是这样而已。这就是这段话所要表达的意思。巴利
182.Animittaṃ cetosamādhinti vipassanācittasamādhiṃ. So hi niccanimittādivirahito animittoti vuccati. Imameva kāyanti vipassanāya vatthuṃ dasseti. Tattha imamevāti imaṃ eva catumahābhūtikaṃ. Saḷāyatanikanti saḷāyatanapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ. Jīvitapaccayāti yāva jīvitindriyānaṃ pavatti, tāva jīvitapaccayā pavattadarathamattā atthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
183 183. 再者,“无相”这句话,是为了显示以观智反过来再观照观智本身而说的。“缘于欲漏”是说:在这里,也就是在圣道和圣果当中,并不存在因为缘于欲漏而生起、运作的那种热恼。“就是这具身体”这句话,是为了显示这具有余依的热恼而说的。这样一来,先以人想去除村落想……乃至以圣道去除观智之后,便逐步显示出了所谓的“究竟空”。巴利
183. Puna animittanti vipassanāya paṭivipassanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Kāmāsavaṃ paṭiccāti kāmāsavaṃ paṭicca uppajjanapavattadarathā idha na santi, ariyamagge ceva ariyaphale ca natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Imameva kāyanti imaṃ upādisesadarathadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Iti manussasaññāya gāmasaññaṃ nivattetvā…pe… maggena vipassanaṃ nivattetvā anupubbena accantasuññatā nāma dassitā hoti.
184 “清净”就是没有杂染烦恼。“无上”就是没有比它更高的,是一切当中最殊胜的。“空”就是空果定。“因此”,是因为过去那些被称为佛陀、独觉佛、佛弟子的沙门婆罗门,未来和现在那些被称为佛陀、佛弟子的沙门婆罗门,都已经证得、将会证得、正在证得这同样的清净、至高、无上的空而安住,所以才这样说。其余各处都是容易理解的。巴利
184.Parisuddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Anuttaranti uttaravirahitaṃ sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Suññatanti suññataphalasamāpattiṃ. Tasmāti yasmā atītepi, buddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakasaṅkhātā samaṇabrāhmaṇā. Anāgatepi, etarahipi buddhabuddhasāvakasaṅkhātā samaṇabrāhmaṇā imaṃyeva parisuddhaṃ paramaṃ anuttaraṃ suññataṃ upasampajja vihariṃsu viharissanti viharanti ca, tasmā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
2. 《大空经》注释巴利
2. Mahāsuññatasuttavaṇṇanā
185 “如是我闻”这句,是《大空经》的开头。其中“黑凯玛咖”的“黑”,是因为他肤色黝黑,而“凯玛咖”是他的名字。“精舍”是指:就在那座尼拘律园里,选一个地方,围上围墙,建起门楼,又安置了鹅形座等坐卧处,以及圆堂、食堂等设施,这样建成的住处就叫精舍。“众多坐卧具”是指床、凳、褥垫、枕头、席子、皮片、草敷具、叶敷具、秆敷具等,摆放得床挨着床……乃至秆敷具挨着秆敷具,看上去就像众多比丘同住一处一样。巴利
185.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsuññatasuttaṃ. Tattha kāḷakhemakassāti chavivaṇṇena so kāḷo, khemakoti panassa nāmaṃ. Vihāroti tasmiṃyeva nigrodhārāme ekasmiṃ padese pākārena parikkhipitvā dvārakoṭṭhakaṃ māpetvā haṃsavaṭṭakādisenāsanāni ceva maṇḍalamāḷabhojanasālādīni ca patiṭṭhapetvā kato vihāro. Sambahulāni senāsanānīti mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisibimbohanaṃ taṭṭikā cammakhaṇḍo tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro palālasanthārotiādīni paññattāni honti, mañcena mañcaṃ…pe… palālasanthāreneva palālasanthāraṃ āhacca ṭhapitāni, gaṇabhikkhūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhānasadisaṃ ahosi.
“众多吗?”——因为世尊在菩提座上就已将一切烦恼彻底断尽,所以并不存在所谓的疑惑;这只是寻思之前的一个发问,而这里的“吗”字不过是个语气助词罢了。当比丘们前往亲见(世尊)时,就不会再有犹豫不决之事。据说,在这之前,世尊从未见过十个或十二个比丘同住在一个地方。巴利
Sambahulānu khoti bhagavato bodhipallaṅkeyeva sabbakilesānaṃ samugghāṭitattā saṃsayo nāma natthi, vitakkapubbabhāgā pucchā, vitakkapubbabhāge cāyaṃ nukāro nipātamatto. Pāṭimatthakaṃ gacchante avinicchito nāma na hoti. Ito kira pubbe bhagavatā dasa dvādasa bhikkhū ekaṭṭhāne vasantā na diṭṭhapubbā.
他心里这样想:所谓群居,在轮回中早已成了习惯,就像汇入河流的水一样。地狱、畜生道、饿鬼道、阿修罗道,乃至人界、天界、梵天界,到处都是群居。那方圆一万由旬的地狱,就像塞满碎铜屑的竹筒,众生挤得密密麻麻,没有一点空隙;在五种系缚、业报惩罚施行的地方,众生的数量无法计量,也找不到界限;在刀砍斧劈之类的地方也是这样——他们就这样聚集成群地受苦。畜生道里,一个蚁丘中的白蚁多得数不清,各个洞穴里的蚂蚁等等也是如此,畜生道中同样是群居。饿鬼城有的长一俱卢舍,有的半由旬,都塞满了饿鬼。这样看来,饿鬼道也是群居。阿修罗的住处广达一万由旬,却像针刺入耳中的耳孔一样拥挤。所以阿修罗道也是群居。人界中,舍卫城有五百七十万户人家,王舍城内外住着一亿八千万人。其他地方也是这样,人界也是群居。从地居天开始,一直到天界、梵天界,全都是群居。每一位天子都有两千五百万乃至九千万的歌舞眷属,甚至有一万个梵天神同住在一个地方。巴利
Athassa etadahosi – gaṇavāso nāmāyaṃ vaṭṭe āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo nadīotiṇṇaudakasadiso, nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayāsurakāyesupi, manussaloka-devalokabrahmalokesupi gaṇavāsova āciṇṇo. Dasayojanasahasso hi nirayo tipucuṇṇabharitā nāḷi viya sattehi nirantaro, pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇakaraṇaṭṭhāne sattānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā paricchedo vā natthi, tathā vāsīhi tacchanādiṭhānesu, iti gaṇabhūtāva paccanti. Tiracchānayoniyaṃ ekasmiṃ vammike upasikānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā paricchedo vā natthi, tathā ekekabilādīsupi kipillikādīnaṃ. Tiracchānayoniyampi gaṇavāsova. Petanagarāni ca gāvutikāni aḍḍhayojanikānipi petabharitāni honti. Evaṃ pettivisayepi gaṇavāsova. Asurabhavanaṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ kaṇṇe pakkhittasūciyā kaṇṇabilaṃ viya hoti. Iti asurakāyepi gaṇavāsova. Manussaloke sāvatthiyaṃ sattapaṇṇāsa kulasatasahassāni, rājagahe anto ca bahi ca aṭṭhārasa manussakoṭiyo vasiṃsu. Evaṃ aññesupi ṭhānesūti manussalokepi gaṇavāsova. Bhummadevatā ādiṃ katvā devalokabrahmalokesupi gaṇavāsova. Ekekassa hi devaputtassa aḍḍhatiyā nāṭakakoṭiyo honti, navapi koṭiyo honti, ekaṭṭhāne dasasahassāpi brahmāno vasanti.
他接着想:我为摧破群居,在四大阿僧祇劫又十万劫中圆满了十巴拉密,而这些比丘从一开始就结成团体,耽著于群居,做着不相应的事。他生起对法的警策后,又想:如果能制定一条学处说“两位比丘不可同住一处”,我就该制定这条学处,但这根本做不到。这样吧,我来宣说一部名叫《大空行经》的经,对于想要修学的善男子们,这部经会像学处的制定一样,也像挂在城门上的全身镜一样。就像在一面镜子里,刹帝利等人看见自己的过失,舍弃它而变得没有过失;同样,即使我般涅槃后,在五千年里,善男子们只要思维这部经,驱散群聚,乐于独处,就能终结轮回之苦。世尊的心愿仿佛得到了满足——那些思维这部经、驱散群聚、灭尽轮回之苦而般涅槃的善男子们,数量多到无法计算。据说在瓦利卡皮陀寺,有一位名叫无畏的论师,在雨安居时和许多比丘一起诵习这部经后说:“正自觉者是这样做的,我们在做什么呢?”他们全都在雨安居期间驱散群聚,乐于独处,证得了阿拉汉果。这部经就叫《散群经》。巴利
Tato cintesi – ‘‘mayā satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni gaṇavāsaviddhaṃsanatthaṃ dasa pāramiyo pūritā, ime ca bhikkhū ito paṭṭhāyeva gaṇaṃ bandhitvā gaṇābhiratā jātā ananucchavikaṃ karontī’’ti. So dhammasaṃvegaṃ uppādetvā puna cintesi – ‘‘sace ‘ekaṭṭhāne dvīhi bhikkhūhi na vasitabba’nti sakkā bhaveyya sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetuṃ, sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpeyyaṃ, na kho panetaṃ sakkā. Handāhaṃ mahāsuññatāpaṭipattiṃ nāma suttantaṃ desemi, yaṃ sikkhākāmānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ sikkhāpadapaññatti viya nagaradvāre nikkhittasabbakāyikaādāso viya ca bhavissati. Tato yathā nāmekasmiṃ ādāse khattiyādayo attano vajjaṃ disvā taṃ pahāya anavajjā honti, evamevaṃ mayi parinibbutepi pañcavassasahassāni imaṃ suttaṃ āvajjitvā gaṇaṃ vinodetvā ekībhāvābhiratā kulaputtā vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ karissantī’’ti. Bhagavato ca manorathaṃ pūrentā viya imaṃ suttaṃ āvajjitvā gaṇaṃ vinodetvā vaṭṭadukkhaṃ khepetvā parinibbutā kulaputtā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā. Vālikapiṭṭhivihārepi hi ābhidhammikaabhayatthero nāma vassūpanāyikasamaye sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ imaṃ suttaṃ sañjhāyitvā ‘‘sammāsambuddho evaṃ kāreti, mayaṃ kiṃ karomā’’ti āha. Te sabbepi antovasse gaṇaṃ vinodetvā ekībhāvābhiratā arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Gaṇabhedanaṃ nāma idaṃ suttanti.
186 在嘎塔家:指一位名叫嘎塔的释迦族人的住处。寺院:应当知道,这座寺院也在榕树园的一处,就像黑安稳的寺院那样建成的。做衣事:对破旧脏衣进行补缀、清洗等修整,也算;为新得布料进行裁剪、缝制等尚未完成的工作,也算;但这里指的是尚未完成的准备工作。人们把衣料布施给阿难长老,所以长老带着许多比丘在那里做衣事。那些比丘从清早能看清针眼的时候起就坐着,到看不清的时候才起身。他们想:“等针线活做完,我们再整理坐卧处。”所以就没有整理。长老说“这是我们做衣的时候”,其实是这样想的:“这些比丘肯定没有收拾坐卧处,世尊也已经看见了。这样一来,导师会不高兴,想要严厉呵责他们。我要为这些比丘作支撑。”所以才那样说。不过,这里真正的意思是:“尊者,这些比丘并不是贪著做事,他们只是因为做衣的因缘才这样住着。”巴利
186.Ghaṭāyāti evaṃnāmakassa sakkassa. Vihāreti ayampi vihāro nigrodhārāmasseva ekadese kāḷakhemakassa vihāro viya katoti veditabbo. Cīvarakammanti jiṇṇamalinānaṃ aggaḷaṭṭhānuppādanadhovanādīhi kataparibhaṇḍampi, cīvaratthāya uppannavatthānaṃ vicāraṇasibbanādīhi akataṃ saṃvidhānampi vaṭṭati, idha pana akataṃ saṃvidhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Manussā hi ānandattherassa cīvarasāṭake adaṃsu. Tasmā thero sambahule bhikkhū gahetvā tattha cīvarakammaṃ akāsi. Tepi bhikkhū pātova sūcipāsakassa paññāyanakālato paṭṭhāya nisinnā apaññāyanakāle uṭṭhahanti. Sūcikamme niṭṭhiteyeva senāsanāni saṃvidahissāmāti na saṃvidahiṃsu. Cīvarakārasamayo noti thero kira cintesi – ‘‘addhā etehi bhikkhūhi na paṭisāmitāni senāsanāni, bhagavatā ca diṭṭhāni bhavissanti. Iti anattamano satthā suṭṭhu niggahetukāmo, imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upatthambho bhavissāmī’’ti; tasmā evamāha. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – ‘‘na, bhante, ime bhikkhū kammārāmā eva, cīvarakiccavasena pana evaṃ vasantī’’ti.
阿难,不管是有事要做的时候,还是没事要做的时候;不管是缝制袈裟的时候,还是不必缝制袈裟的时候,一个喜欢与人结伴的比丘终究是不光彩的。你不要在该不支持的地方去支持。这里,“喜欢结伴”是指和自己的徒众聚在一起;“成群”是指和各式各样的人混在一起。所以,不管是喜欢结伴还是喜欢成群,只要一个比丘热衷于众人聚集、被群体的束缚绑住,他就完全不光彩。反过来,一个比丘在午后打扫好白天休息的地方、洗净手脚、拿起根本的修行所缘,乐于独自安住,他在佛陀的教法里才是光彩的。“出离之乐”是指从欲乐中出离后得到的快乐。“远离之乐”也是指远离欲乐的快乐。而“止息之乐”能带来贪等烦恼的止息。“正觉之乐”能带来圣道的觉悟。“随意获得”是指随自己的意愿、想要就能得到。“不费力获得”是指没有痛苦就能得到。“轻松获得”是指丰足地得到。巴利
Na kho, ānandāti, ānanda, kammasamayo vā hotu akammasamayo vā, cīvarakārasamayo vā hotu acīvarakārasamayo vā, atha kho saṅgaṇikārāmo bhikkhu na sobhatiyeva. Mā tvaṃ anupatthambhaṭṭhāne upatthambho ahosīti. Tattha saṅgaṇikāti sakaparisasamodhānaṃ. Gaṇoti nānājanasamodhānaṃ. Iti saṅgaṇikārāmo vā hotu gaṇārāmo vā, sabbathāpi gaṇabāhullābhirato gaṇabandhanabaddho bhikkhu na sobhati. Pacchābhatte pana divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā sudhotahatthapādo mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā ekārāmatamanuyutto bhikkhu buddhasāsane sobhati. Nekkhammasukhanti kāmato nikkhantassa sukhaṃ. Pavivekasukhampi kāmapavivekasukhameva. Rāgādīnaṃ pana vūpasamatthāya saṃvattatīti upasamasukhaṃ. Maggasambodhatthāya saṃvattatīti sambodhisukhaṃ. Nikāmalābhīti kāmalābhī icchitalābhī. Akicchalābhīti adukkhalābhī. Akasiralābhīti vipulalābhī.
“暂时的”是指在入定的那段时间里从烦恼中解脱出来。“可意的”就是令人欢喜、可爱的。“心解脱”是指色界与无色界的心解脱。正如这样说:“四禅那和四无色定,这是暂时的解脱。”(《无碍解道》1.213)
“非暂时的”不是按某个时段从烦恼中解脱,而是究竟解脱,说的是出世间。正如这样说:“四圣道和四沙门果,这是非暂时的解脱。”“不动的”就是不会被烦恼所动摇。巴利
Sāmāyikanti appitappitasamaye kilesehi vimuttaṃ. Kantanti manāpaṃ. Cetovimuttinti rūpārūpāvacaracittavimuttiṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘cattāri ca jhānāni catasso ca arūpasamāpattiyo, ayaṃ sāmāyiko vimokkho’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.213). Asāmāyikanti na samayavasena kilesehi vimuttaṃ, atha kho accantavimuttaṃ lokuttaraṃ vuttaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘cattāro ca ariyamaggā cattāri ca sāmaññaphalāni, ayaṃ asāmāyiko vimokkho’’ti. Akuppanti kilesehi akopetabbaṃ.
说到这里,到底说明了什么?喜欢结伴的比丘被群体关系绑住,既没办法修出世间功德,也没办法修出出世间功德;只有离开群体、乐于独处的人才能做到。就像维巴西佛还是菩萨时,被八万四千出家众围绕,游行了七年,也没能修出一切知智;等他离开群体,在七天里独自安住,登上菩提座,才修出了一切知智。我们的菩萨和五比丘一起游行了六年,也没能修出一切知智;等他们离开后,他独自安住,登上菩提座,才修出了一切知智。巴利
Ettāvatā kiṃ kathitaṃ hoti? Saṅgaṇikārāmo bhikkhu gaṇabandhanabaddho neva lokiyaguṇaṃ, na ca lokuttaraguṇaṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkoti, gaṇaṃ vinodetvā pana ekābhirato sakkoti. Tathā hi vipassī bodhisatto caturāsītiyā pabbajitasahassehi parivuto satta vassāni vicaranto sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi, gaṇaṃ vinodetvā sattadivase ekībhāvābhirato bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattesi. Amhākaṃ bodhisatto pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ chabbassāni vicaranto sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi, tesu pakkantesu ekībhāvābhirato bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha sabbaññuguṇaṃ nibbattesi.
像这样说明了乐于群聚的人无法证得功德之后,现在为了说明由此产生的过患,世尊说“阿难,我不见……”等语。其中,“色”指身体。“若对某色染著”是指在某种色上因贪欲而染著。“不会生起”是指:对某色染著的人,那些过患不会生起——这样的色我不见。然而,因舍利弗和目犍连成为十力声闻这种程度的变异,过患就如同桑恰亚因他们离去而生起忧恼那样生起,又像因优波离居士的转变令尼乾陀·若提子痛苦那样生起,也像《所爱生经》中长者等人因亲人变故而忧愁悲伤那样生起——这些过患是一定会生起的。巴利
Evaṃ saṅgaṇikārāmassa guṇādhigamābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni dosuppattiṃ dassento nāhaṃ ānandātiādimāha. Tattha rūpanti sarīraṃ. Yattha rattassāti yasmiṃ rūpe rāgavasena rattassa. Na uppajjeyyunti yasmiṃ rūpe rattassa na uppajjeyyuṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ na samanupassāmi, atha kho sāriputtamoggallānānaṃ dasabalasāvakattupagamanasaṅkhātena aññathābhāvena sañcayassa viya, upāligahapatino aññathābhāvena nāṭaputtassa viya, piyajātikasutte seṭṭhiādīnaṃ viya ca uppajjantiyeva.
187 然而,阿难,正是这个……这句话的连结是什么呢?如果有愚痴的新出家比丘这样说:“正自觉者就像把闯进田地的母牛赶出去一样,把我们赶出人群,让我们独自待着,自己却由国王、大臣等围绕着安住。”为了彻底堵住这种说法的机会,也为了说明“即使坐在以轮围世界为边际的群众中间,如来也是独自一人”,才开始这段开示。其中,“一切相”指色等诸行的相。“内”指所缘境的内在。“空”指空果等至。“于彼”是处格用作受格,说的就是那个心。而“复于彼”指安住在那群众之中。“趣向远离”就是趣向涅槃。“已终结”就是从烦恼住处之法中已尽、出离、脱离。“与劝导出离语相属”就是与“你们去吧”这样劝导出离的话语相关联。巴利
187.Ayaṃkho panānandāti ko anusandhi? Sace hi koci dubbuddhī navapabbajito vadeyya – ‘‘sammāsambuddho khettaṃ paviṭṭhā gāviyo viya amheyeva gaṇato nīharati, ekībhāve niyojeti, sayaṃ pana rājarājamahāmattādīhi parivuto viharatī’’ti, tassa vacanokāsupacchedanatthaṃ – ‘‘cakkavāḷapariyantāya parisāya majjhe nisinnopi tathāgato ekakovā’’ti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpādīnaṃ saṅkhanimittānaṃ. Ajjhattanti visayajjhattaṃ. Suññatanti suññataphalasamāpattiṃ. Tatra ceti upayogatthe bhummaṃ, taṃ ceti vuttaṃ hoti. Puna tatrāti tasmiṃ parisamajjhe ṭhito. Vivekaninnenāti nibbānaninnena. Byantībhūtenāti āsavaṭṭhānīyadhammehi vigatantena nissaṭena visaṃyuttena. Uyyojanikapaṭisaṃyuttanti gacchatha tumheti evaṃ uyyojanikena vacanena paṭisaṃyuttaṃ.
世尊是在什么时候这样说的呢?是在吃完午饭后的那段时间,或者是在初夜的那段时间。世尊吃完午饭后,在香室里以狮子卧的姿势休息,起来之后入果定,然后坐下。那个时候,大众为了听法而聚集过来。世尊知道时间到了,就从香室出来,登上最殊胜的佛座,说完法之后,就像按时煮好药油、不耽误时机一样,以倾向于远离的心把大众遣散。在初夜时分,他也同样以“夜已经深了,瓦塞塔,现在你们觉得是时候了”这样的话来遣散大众。因为诸佛从证悟菩提开始,就连两种五识也都是倾向于涅槃的。所以“因此,阿难”的意思是:因为空住是寂静、殊胜的,所以说……巴利
Kāya pana velāya bhagavā evaṃ katheti? Pacchābhattakiccavelāya, vā purimayāmakiccavelāya vā. Bhagavā hi pacchābhatte gandhakuṭiyaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappetvā vuṭṭhāya phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdati. Tasmiṃ samaye dhammassavanatthāya parisā sannipatanti. Atha bhagavā kālaṃ viditvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā buddhāsanavaragato dhammaṃ desetvā bhesajjatelapākaṃ gaṇhanto viya kālaṃ anatikkamitvā vivekaninnena cittena parisaṃ uyyojeti . Purimayāmepi ‘‘abhikkantā kho vāseṭṭhā ratti, yassa dāni kālaṃ maññathā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.299) evaṃ uyyojeti . Buddhānañhi bodhipattito paṭṭhāya dve pañcaviññāṇānipi nibbānaninnāneva. Tasmātihānandāti yasmā suññatāvihāro santo paṇīto, tasmā.
188 “内”就是指所缘的内在。“内的空”在这里指自身内在,意思是依止于自己的五蕴。“正知”,是指由于觉知业处未成就之状态而成为正知。“外”,是指他人的五蕴。“内外”,是指有时向内、有时向外。“不动”,是指怀着“我将成为俱分解脱者”的想法,而作意于不动无色定。巴利
188.Ajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattameva. Ajjhattaṃ suññatanti idha niyakajjhattaṃ, attano pañcasu khandhesu nissitanti attho. Sampajāno hotīti kammaṭṭhānassa asampajjanabhāvajānanena sampajāno. Bahiddhāti parassa pañcasu khandhesu. Ajjhattabahiddhāti kālena ajjhattaṃ kālena bahiddhā . Āneñjanti ubhatobhāgavimutto bhavissāmāti āneñjaṃ arūpasamāpattiṃ manasi karoti.
“就在那前面的”这句话,是就基础禅那而说的。因为从尚未熟练的基础禅那出定的人,向内作意空时,心不能跃入其中;于是他转念:“在别人的相续中又是怎样呢?”便向外作意,心在那里也不能跃入;接着他又想:“有时在自己的相续中,有时在别人的相续中,又是怎样呢?”便内外交替作意,心在那里也不能跃入;此后,他想要成为俱分解脱者,心想:“在无色定中又是怎样呢?”便作意不动,心在那里也不能跃入。现在,当心生“我的心不能跃入”之念时,不应以松懈的精进而跟在侍者等人后面走,而应反复善巧地作意基础禅那。就像伐木的人,斧头钝了砍不下去时,再把斧头磨锋利后继续砍,斧头就能砍断该断的地方;同样,对业处的作意也会运转起来。于是说了“就在那……”等话。接着,为了显示这样修行的人无论作意什么、在在处处作意都能成就,所以说“跃入”。巴利
Tasmiṃyeva purimasminti pādakajjhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Apaguṇapādakajjhānato vuṭṭhitassa hi ajjhattaṃ suññataṃ manasikaroto tattha cittaṃ na pakkhandati. Tato ‘‘parassa santāne nu kho katha’’nti bahiddhā manasi karoti, tatthapi na pakkhandati. Tato – ‘‘kālena attano santāne, kālena parassa santāne nu kho katha’’nti ajjhattabahiddhā manasi karoti, tatthapi na pakkhandati. Tato ubhatobhāgavimutto hotukāmo ‘‘arūpasamāpattiyaṃ nu kho katha’’nti āneñjaṃ manasi karoti, tatthapi na pakkhandati. Idāni – ‘‘na me cittaṃ pakkhandatīti vissaṭṭhavīriyena upaṭṭhākādīnaṃ pacchato na caritabbaṃ, pādakajjhānameva pana sādhukaṃ punappunaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Evamassa rukkhe chindato pharasumhi avahante puna nisitaṃ kāretvā chindantassa chijjesu pharasu viya kammaṭṭhāne manasikāro vahatī’’ti dassetuṃ tasmiṃyevātiādimāha. Idānissa evaṃ paṭipannassa yaṃ yaṃ manasi karoti, tattha tattha manasikāro sampajjatīti dassento pakkhandatīti āha.
189 以这个住来说,就是以这个止观之住来说。这样,在那里正知,意思是:即使在经行的时候,当那个业处正在成就时,因为知道“我的业处正在成就”,所以就是正知。躺卧,就是躺下来。在这里,经行一段时间之后,知道“我现在还能经行这么久”,在不舍弃威仪的情况下,应当站立。这个道理适用于每一个场合。将不说,意思是:这样,在那里,因为知道“我将不说这样的话”,所以在那里就是正知而行者。巴利
189.Iminā vihārenāti iminā samathavipassanāvihārena. Itiha tattha sampajānoti iti caṅkamantopi tasmiṃ kammaṭṭhāne sampajjamāne ‘‘sampajjati me kammaṭṭhāna’’nti jānanena sampajāno hoti. Sayatīti nipajjati. Ettha kañci kālaṃ caṅkamitvā – ‘‘idāni ettakaṃ kālaṃ caṅkamituṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti ñatvā iriyāpathaṃ ahāpetvā ṭhātabbaṃ. Esa nayo sabbavāresu . Na kathessāmīti, itiha tatthāti evaṃ na kathessāmīti jānanena tattha sampajānakārī hoti.
再者,在第二个场合,由于知道“我将说这样的话”,他就成为正知而行者。这位比丘的止观还很稚弱,为了保护它们——巴利
Puna dutiyavāre evarūpiṃ kathaṃ kathessāmīti jānanena sampajānakārī hoti, imassa bhikkhuno samathavipassanā taruṇāva, tāsaṃ anurakkhaṇatthaṃ –
“ 住处、行境、言谈、人、饮食,
时节、威仪,若适宜则应亲近。”巴利
‘‘Āvāso gocaro bhassaṃ, puggalo atha bhojanaṃ; Utu iriyāpatho ceva, sappāyo sevitabbako’’ti.
应当希求七种适宜的事物。为了说明这些,才说了这段话。在关于寻的各节中,应当通过了解无寻和有寻两种情况来理解正知。巴利
Satta sappāyāni icchitabbāni. Tesaṃ dassanatthamidaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkavāresu avitakkanassa ca vitakkanassa ca jānanena sampajānatā veditabbā.
190 190. 这样,通过断除寻而讲完两种道之后,现在为了说明第三种道的观,而说了“阿难,确实有这五种欲乐”等。“处”:就是指在那些欲乐当中,某一个能生起烦恼的因缘。“现行”:指由于现行而还没有被断除的烦恼。“如是存在”:就是像这样实际存在着。“正知”:指由于了知业处还没有达到而成为正知。在第二转中,“如是存在的此”:就是当它这样存在时的这个。“正知”:指由于了知业处已经达到而成为正知。因为这个人这样观察:“我对五种欲乐的欲贪到底断了没有?”知道还没有断除之后,就提起精进,用不来道把它彻底根除。那之后紧接着就是道果,从果出定后再观察时,他了知已经断除的状态。由于他的这种了知,所以说“成为正知”。巴利
190. Iti vitakkapahānena dve magge kathetvā idāni tatiyamaggassa vipassanaṃ ācikkhanto pañca kho ime, ānanda, kāmaguṇātiādimāha. Āyataneti tesuyeva kāmaguṇesu kismiñcideva kilesuppattikāraṇe. Samudācāroti samudācaraṇato appahīnakileso. Evaṃsantanti evaṃ vijjamānameva. Sampajānoti kammaṭṭhānassa asampattijānanena sampajāno. Dutiyavāre evaṃ santametanti evaṃ sante etaṃ. Sampajānoti kammaṭṭhānasampattijānanena sampajāno. Ayañhi ‘‘pahīno nu kho me pañcasu kāmaguṇesu chandarāgo no’’ti paccavekkhamāno apahīnabhāvaṃ ñatvā vīriyaṃ paggahetvā taṃ anāgāmimaggena samugghāṭeti, tato maggānantaraṃ phalaṃ, phalato vuṭṭhāya paccavekkhamāno pahīnabhāvaṃ jānāti, tassa jānanena ‘‘sampajāno hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
191 191. 现在,为了说明阿拉汉道的观修,而说了“阿难,确实有这五种取蕴”等话。其中,“它被断除”是指:在诸色上,“我是”的慢、“我是”的欲、“我是”的随眠被断除。在受等诸蕴上也是如此。正知则应按照前面所说的方式来了知。巴利
191. Idāni arahattamaggassa vipassanaṃ ācikkhanto pañca kho ime, ānanda, upādānakkhandhātiādimāha. Tattha so pahīyatīti rūpe asmīti māno asmīti chando asmīti anusayo pahīyati. Tathā vedanādīsu sampajānatā vuttanāyeneva veditabbā.
阿难,这些法,是指上面所说的止观、道与果这些法。善所生,就是从善而来的。因为善既是善,也是善所生,比如:初禅是善,第二禅既是善也是善所生……无所有处是善,非想非非想处既是善也是善所生;非想非非想处是善,入流道既是善也是善所生……不来道是善,阿拉汉道既是善也是善所生。同样地,初禅是善,与它相应的诸法既是善也是善所生……阿拉汉道是善,与它相应的诸法既是善也是善所生。巴利
Ime kho te, ānanda, dhammāti heṭṭhā kathite samathavipassanāmaggaphaladhamme sandhāyāha. Kusalāyatikāti kusalato āgatā. Kusalā hi kusalāpi honti kusalāyatikāpi, seyyathidaṃ, paṭhamajjhānaṃ kusalaṃ, dutiyajjhānaṃ kusalañceva kusalāyatikañca…pe… ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ kusalaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kusalañceva kusalāyatikañca, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ kusalaṃ, sotāpattimaggo kusalo ceva kusalāyatiko ca…pe… anāgāmimaggo kusalo, arahattamaggo kusalo ceva kusalāyatiko ca. Tathā paṭhamajjhānaṃ kusalaṃ, taṃsampayuttakā dhammā kusalā ceva kusalāyatikā ca…pe… arahattamaggo kusalo, taṃsampayuttakā dhammā kusalā ceva kusalāyatikā ca.
圣者:就是没有烦恼、清净的人。出世间的:就是在世间之上、超胜的。未被恶者进入:就是不被恶者魔罗进入。因为比丘进入以观为基的八等至后安坐时,魔罗看不见他的心,无法知道“他正依靠这个所缘而运作”。所以说“未被进入”。巴利
Ariyāti nikkilesā visuddhā. Lokuttarāti loke uttarā visiṭṭhā. Anavakkantāpāpimatāti pāpimantena mārena anokkantā. Vipassanāpādakā aṭṭha samāpattiyo appetvā nisinnassa hi bhikkhuno cittaṃ māro na passati, ‘‘idaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ nissāya saṃvattatī’’ti jātituṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā ‘‘anavakkantā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“你对此怎么想?”这句话为什么说呢?是为了说明即使在群体中,也有一种功德,所以才这么说。“应随从”:就是跟随、侍奉。巴利
Taṃ kiṃ maññasīti idaṃ kasmā āha? Gaṇepi eko ānisaṃso atthi, taṃ dassetuṃ idamāha. Anubandhitunti anugacchituṃ paricarituṃ.
阿难,不是这样的。这里虽然说世尊曾把多闻的圣弟子比作具备五种武器的战士,就像《增支部》7.67 里说的:诸比丘,多闻的圣弟子舍断不善,修习善法,舍断有罪过的,修习无罪过的,守护清净的自己。但是,如果有人虽然掌握了所听闻的教法,却不按照与它相应的随顺之道去实践,那教法对他来说就不成其为武器;只有真正去实践的人,教法才成为他的武器。因此,为了表明不值得为了那个目的去追随,世尊才说:阿难,不是这样的。巴利
Na kho, ānandāti ettha kiñcāpi bhagavatā – ‘‘sutāvudho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti, sāvajjaṃ pajahati, anavajjaṃ bhāveti, suddhaṃ attānaṃ pariharatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.67) bahussuto pañcāvudhasampanno yodho viya kato. Yasmā pana so sutapariyattiṃ uggahetvāpi tadanucchavikaṃ anulomapaṭipadaṃ na paṭipajjati, na tassa taṃ āvudhaṃ hoti. Yo paṭipajjati, tasseva hoti. Tasmā etadatthaṃ anubandhituṃ nārahatīti dassento na kho, ānandāti āha.
现在,为了说明接下来应当追随什么目的,说了“又,哪些……”等话。如此,在这部经里,十种论事出现在三个地方。“我要说这样的谈论”,是依适合与不适合而出现的;“也就是经、应颂”这里,是依所闻教法而出现的;在这个地方,则是依圆满具足而出现的。因此,在这部经中讲述十种论事的人,应当站在这个位置上来说。巴利
Idāni yadatthaṃ anubandhitabbo, taṃ dassetuṃ yā ca khotiādimāha. Iti imasmiṃ sutte tīsu ṭhānesu dasa kathāvatthūni āgatāni. ‘‘Iti evarūpaṃ kathaṃ kathessāmī’’ti sappāyāsappāyavasena āgatāni, ‘‘yadidaṃ suttaṃ geyya’’nti ettha sutapariyattivasena āgatāni, imasmiṃ ṭhāne paripūraṇavasena āgatāni. Tasmā imasmiṃ sutte dasa kathāvatthūni kathentena imasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhatvā kathetabbāni.
现在,因为有些人即使独自一人居住,也达不到目的,所以针对这种情况,为了显示独处的过患,才说了“阿难,既然如此……”等等。其中,“既然如此”就是指这种独处的状态存在时。巴利
Idāni yasmā ekaccassa ekakassa viharatopi attho na sampajjati, tasmā taṃ sandhāya ekībhāve ādīnavaṃ dassento evaṃ sante kho, ānandātiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ santeti evaṃ ekībhāve sante.
193 导师:这里指外道的导师。随转:就是跟随、靠近。渴望迷恋:就是希求沉迷的渴爱,也就是令它生起的意思。因师之灾患:由于内在生起的烦恼灾患,而成为导师的灾患。其他的灾患也是同样的道理。他们杀害了他:就是他们杀死了他。以此说明功德的消亡。巴利
193.Satthāti bāhirako titthakarasatthā. Anvāvattantīti anuāvattanti upasaṅkamanti. Mucchaṃ kāmayatīti mucchanataṇhaṃ pattheti, pavattetīti attho. Ācariyūpaddavenāti abbhantare uppannena kilesūpaddavena ācariyassupaddavo. Sesupaddavesupi eseva nayo. Avadhiṃsu nanti mārayiṃsu naṃ. Etena hi guṇamaraṇaṃ kathitaṃ.
“堕落”的意思就是彻底地掉落。那为什么偏偏说梵行方面的灾患是“苦报更重、剧报更重,还能导致堕落”呢?因为外道出家得到的利益很少,那里没有什么大的功德可以证得,只不过有一点八等至和五神通而已。就像从驴背上摔下来,不会有什么大苦,只是身上沾了点尘土罢了;同样,在外道教法里退失,也只是从世间功德上退失而已,所以前面那两种灾患没有这样被说。但在佛陀的教法里,出家有很大的利益,那里有大的功德可以证得:四道、四果和涅槃。就像出身高贵的刹帝利青年,坐在上好的象背上巡游城市时,如果从象背上摔下来,就会遭受极大的痛苦;同样,从教法中退堕的人,会从九种出世间功德中退失。因此,这梵行灾患才被这样说。巴利
Vinipātāyāti suṭṭhu nipatanāya. Kasmā pana brahmacārupaddavova – ‘‘dukkhavipākataro ca kaṭukavipākataro ca vinipātāya ca saṃvattatī’’ti vuttoti. Bāhirapabbajjā hi appalābhā, tattha mahanto nibbattetabbaguṇo natthi, aṭṭhasamāpattipañcābhiññāmattakameva hoti. Iti yathā gadrabhapiṭṭhito patitassa mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ na hoti, sarīrassa paṃsumakkhanamattameva hoti, evaṃ bāhirasamaye lokiyaguṇamattatova parihāyati, tena purimaṃ upaddavadvayaṃ na evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sāsane pana pabbajjā mahālābhā, tattha cattāro maggā cattāri phalāni nibbānanti mahantā adhigantabbaguṇā. Iti yathā ubhato sujāto khattiyakumāro hatthikkhandhavaragato nagaraṃ anusañcaranto hatthikkhandhato patito mahādukkhaṃ nigacchati, evaṃ sāsanato parihāyamāno navahi lokuttaraguṇehi parihāyati. Tenāyaṃ brahmacārupaddavo evaṃ vutto.
196 因此:因为跟其他灾患相比,梵行灾患的苦报更重;又因为奉行对待怨敌之道,会在漫长岁月里带来无益和痛苦,而奉行对待朋友之道则带来利益,所以说“因此”。上面的义理和下面的义理都应该这样结合起来理解。“具足友道”是指依朋友之道而行;“具足敌道”是指依怨敌之道而行。巴利
196.Tasmāti yasmā sesupaddavehi brahmacārupaddavo dukkhavipākataro, yasmā vā sapattapaṭipattiṃ vītikkamanto dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati, mittapaṭipatti hitāya, tasmā. Evaṃ uparimenapi heṭṭhimenapi atthena yojetabbaṃ. Mittavatāyāti mittapaṭipattiyā. Sapattavatāyāti verapaṭipattiyā.
偏离导师的教法:只要故意违犯,哪怕只是恶作或恶语这么一点点,就叫做偏离而行。只有完全不违犯,才叫做没有偏离而行。巴利
Vokkammaca satthusāsanāti dukkaṭadubbhāsitamattampi hi sañcicca vītikkamanto vokkamma vattati nāma. Tadeva avītikkamanto na vokkamma vattati nāma.
阿难,我不会对你们那样用力。所谓“生坯”,就是还没烧制的。所谓“在生坯器皿上”,就是在还没烧制、还不太坚固的器皿上。因为陶匠对待还没烧制、还不太坚固的生坯时,会用双手轻轻地捧住,心想“别让它碎了”。所以,陶匠在那种情况下怎么做,我不会对你们那样做。所谓“呵责又呵责”,意思是:教导一次之后,我不会就沉默不管,而是一再呵责之后,反复地教导、训诫。所谓“淘汰又淘汰”,意思是:把过失一再地排除掉。就像陶匠在处理已烧制的器皿时,会把破裂的、有裂痕的、破旧的淘汰掉、放到一边,只把烧得好的反复敲打、反复取用;同样,我也会一再淘汰,然后反复地教导、训诫。所谓“凡是有坚实核心的,他就会安住”,意思是:在我这样教导你们时,谁有道果的坚实核心,他就会安住。此外,世间的功德在这里也被认为是“核心”。其余各处都很容易理解。巴利
Na vo ahaṃ, ānanda, tathā parakkamissāmīti ahaṃ tumhesu tathā na paṭipajjissāmi. Āmaketi apakke. Āmakamatteti āmake nātisukkhe bhājane. Kumbhakāro hi āmakaṃ nātisukkhaṃ apakkaṃ ubhohi hatthehi saṇhikaṃ gaṇhāti ‘‘mā bhijjatū’’ti. Iti yathā kumbhakāro tattha paṭipajjati, nāhaṃ tumhesu tathā paṭipajjissāmi. Niggayha niggayhāti sakiṃ ovaditvā tuṇhī na bhavissāmi, niggaṇhitvā niggaṇhitvā punappunaṃ ovadissāmi anusāsissāmi. Pavayha pavayhāti dose pavāhetvā pavāhetvā. Yathā pakkabhājanesu kumbhakāro bhinnachinnajajjarāni pavāhetvā ekato katvā supakkāneva ākoṭetvā ākoṭetvā gaṇhāti, evameva ahampi pavāhetvā pavāhetvā punappunaṃ ovadissāmi anusāsissāmi. Yosāro so ṭhassatīti evaṃ vo mayā ovadiyamānānaṃ yo maggaphalasāro, so ṭhassati. Apica lokiyaguṇāpi idha sārotveva adhippetā. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《稀有未曾有法经》的注释巴利
3. Acchariyaabbhutasuttavaṇṇanā
197 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《稀有未曾有法经》。其中,“于此处”(yatra hi nāma)是表示稀有意义的语气词,意思是“那位名为如来的”。“已断除戏论”:这里的戏论指渴爱、慢、见这三种烦恼。“已断轮回之轮辐”:这里轮辐是指善业与不善业的轮回。“已遍尽轮转者”是它的同义词。“已超越一切苦者”:意思是超越了由一切异熟轮回所摄的一切苦。“将随念”:这里的“于何处”(yatra)是依语气词用法而说的未来时,但此处之义应依过去时理解。因为世尊是随念那些过去佛,并非现在将随念。“如是生者”:维巴西佛等为刹帝利种姓,咖咕桑特佛等为婆罗门种姓。“如是族姓者”:维巴西佛等为孔丹尼亚族姓,咖咕桑特佛等为迦叶族姓。“如是戒者”:以世间与出世间戒而如是具戒。“如是法者”:这里指的是属于定方面的诸法。以世间与出世间定而如是具定,这是意思。“如是慧者”:以世间与出世间慧而如是具慧。“如是住者”:这里因为上文已取属于定方面的诸法,所以住也已取;若问为何又取已取者,则这不是重复取已取者。这是为了说明灭尽定,因此这里的意思是“如是灭尽定住者”。巴利
197.Evaṃme sutanti acchariyaabbhutasuttaṃ. Tattha yatra hi nāmāti acchariyatthe nipāto. Yo nāma tathāgatoti attho. Chinnapapañceti ettha papañcā nāma taṇhā māno diṭṭhīti ime tayo kilesā. Chinnavaṭumeti ettha vaṭumanti kusalākusalakammavaṭṭaṃ vuccati. Pariyādinnavaṭṭeti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sabbadukkhavītivatteti sabbaṃ vipākavaṭṭasaṅkhātaṃ dukkhaṃ vītivatte. Anussarissatīti idaṃ yatrāti nipātavasena anāgatavacanaṃ, attho panettha atītavasena veditabbo. Bhagavā hi te buddhe anussari, na idāni anussarissati. Evaṃjaccāti vipassīādayo khattiyajaccā, kakusandhādayo brāhmaṇajaccāti. Evaṃgottāti vipassīādayo koṇḍaññagottā, kakusandhādayo kassapagottāti. Evaṃsīlāti lokiyalokuttarasīlena evaṃsīlā. Evaṃdhammāti ettha samādhipakkhā dhammā adhippetā . Lokiyalokuttarena samādhinā evaṃsamādhinoti attho. Evaṃpaññāti lokiyalokuttarapaññāya evaṃpaññā. Evaṃvihārīti ettha pana heṭṭhā samādhipakkhānaṃ dhammānaṃ gahitattā vihāro gahitova, puna kasmā gahitameva gaṇhātīti ce, na idaṃ gahitameva. Idañhi nirodhasamāpattidīpanatthaṃ, tasmā evaṃnirodhasamāpattivihārīti ayamettha attho.
“如是解脱”在这里说的是五种解脱:镇伏解脱、彼分解脱、正断解脱、止息解脱、出离解脱。其中,八等至因为是从自己已镇伏的盖等烦恼中解脱出来,所以称为镇伏解脱。无常随观等七种随观,因为各自以对治的方式舍弃了常想等,从中解脱出来,所以称为彼分解脱。四圣道因为彻底断除了烦恼而解脱,所以称为正断解脱。四沙门果因为是在圣道的力量使烦恼止息时生起的,所以称为止息解脱。涅槃因为出离、远离了一切烦恼,安住在遥远之处,所以称为出离解脱。因此,这里的“如是解脱”,应当依照这五种解脱来理解其含义。巴利
Evaṃvimuttāti ettha vikkhambhanavimutti tadaṅgavimutti samucchedavimutti paṭippassaddhivimutti nissaraṇavimuttīti pañcavidhā vimuttiyo. Tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo sayaṃ vikkhambhitehi nīvaraṇādīhi vimuttattā vikkhambhanavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Aniccānupassanādikā satta anupassanā sayaṃ tassa tassa paccanīkaṅgavasena paricattāhi niccasaññādīhi vimuttattā tadaṅgavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Cattāro ariyamaggā sayaṃ samucchinnehi kilesehi vimuttattā samucchedavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Cattāri sāmaññaphalāni maggānubhāvena kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhante uppannattā paṭippassaddhivimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti. Nibbānaṃ sabbakilesehi nissaṭattā apagatattā dūre ṭhitattā nissaraṇavimuttīti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Iti imāsaṃ pañcannaṃ vimuttīnaṃ vasena evaṃvimuttāti evamettha attho veditabbo.
199 因此这句话的意思是:既然你说“如来是稀有的”,那么就让如来的稀有、未曾有之法更多地显现在你面前吧。“具念正知”这里,有两种正知:人界中的正知和天界中的正知。其中,在《韦桑德拉本生》中,菩萨把两个儿子送给了那个婆罗门,第二天又把妻子送给了帝释天神,帝释天神心生欢喜,赐给他八个愿望。当他接受这些愿望时,说了这样的话:巴利
199.Tasmātihāti yasmā tvaṃ ‘‘tathāgatā acchariyā’’ti vadasi, tasmā taṃ bhiyyoso mattāya paṭibhantu tathāgatassa acchariyā abbhutadhammāti. Sato sampajānoti ettha dvesampajaññāni manussaloke devaloke ca. Tattha vessantarajātake brāhmaṇassa dve putte datvā punadivase sakkassa deviṃ datvā sakkena pasīditvā dinne aṭṭha vare gaṇhanto –
“ 我从这里正解脱时,是天界行者、殊胜通达者。
愿我从此不再退转,这是我求的第八个殊胜愿望。”巴利
‘‘Ito vimuccamānāhaṃ, saggagāmī visesagū; Anivattī tato assaṃ, aṭṭhametaṃ varaṃ vare’’ti. (jā. 2.22.2300) –
他发愿说:“愿我结生在兜率天。”从那时起,他就知道自己“将会出生在兜率天”,这是他在人间时的正知。而他从韦桑德拉那一生死后,又结生到兜率天,知道自己“已经出生了”,这是他在天界时的正知。巴利
Evaṃ tusitabhavane me paṭisandhi hotūti varaṃ aggahesi, tato paṭṭhāya tusitabhavane uppajjissāmīti jānāti, idaṃ manussaloke sampajaññaṃ. Vessantarattabhāvato pana cuto puna tusitabhavane nibbattitvā nibbattosmīti aññāsi, idaṃ devaloke sampajaññaṃ.
那其他天神难道不知道吗?不是不知道。那些天神要看过园林、天宫和如意树,再被天伎乐的音乐声唤醒,又有人提醒他们“朋友,这就是天界,你已经投生到这里了”,这才会知道。菩萨在第一速行心的阶段还不知道,从第二速行心开始才知道。因此,他拥有与其他天神不共的了知。巴利
Kiṃ pana sesadevatā na jānantīti? No na jānanti. Tā pana uyyānavimānakapparukkhe oloketvā devanāṭakehi tūriyasaddena pabodhitā ‘‘mārisa ayaṃ devaloko tumhe idha nibbattā’’ti sāritā jānanti. Bodhisatto paṭhamajavanavāre na jānāti, dutiyajavanato paṭṭhāya jānāti. Iccassa aññehi asādhāraṇajānanaṃ hoti.
“他站立”在这里:虽然其他天神也待在那里,知道自己“我们站在这儿”,但他们被六根门中强有力的可爱所缘压倒时,就会丢掉正念,连自己吃过喝过都浑然不知,最后因为断了段食而死去。菩萨难道没有那样的所缘吗?并非没有。菩萨确实在十个方面胜过其余天神,但他不让所缘压倒自己,反而压住所缘而安住。因此经中说:“阿难,菩萨具念正知,在兜率天身中站立。”巴利
Aṭṭhāsīti ettha kiñcāpi aññepi devā tattha ṭhitā ṭhitamhāti jānanti, te pana chasu dvāresu balavatā iṭṭhārammaṇena abhibhuyyamānā satiṃ vissajjetvā attano bhuttapītabhāvampi ajānantā āhārūpacchedena kālaṃ karonti. Bodhisattassa kiṃ tathārūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ natthīti? No natthi. So hi sesadeve dasahi ṭhānehi adhiggaṇhāti, ārammaṇena pana attānaṃ maddituṃ na deti, taṃ ārammaṇaṃ abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sato sampajāno, ānanda, bodhisatto tusite kāye aṭṭhāsī’’ti.
200 “尽其寿量”这一说法,是指在其余的有身中,他难道不是尽其寿量而住吗?是的,他并不如此。因为在别的时候,如果投生到长寿的天界,在那里无法圆满诸巴拉密,于是他便闭上眼,作决意死,然后投生到人间。这种舍命方式,是别人所没有的。而那时,他已经没有未施与的布施,没有未守护的戒,一切巴拉密都已圆满,所以他才安住彼处,直到寿量终尽。巴利
200.Yāvatāyukanti sesattabhāvesu kiṃ yāvatāyukaṃ na tiṭṭhattīti? Āma na tiṭṭhati. Aññadā hi dīghāyukadevaloke nibbatto tattha pāramiyo na sakkā pūretunti akkhīni nimīletvā adhimuttikālaṃkiriyaṃ nāma katvā manussaloke nibbattati . Ayaṃ kālaṅkiriyā aññesaṃ na hoti. Tadā pana adinnadānaṃ nāma natthi, arakkhitasīlaṃ nāma natthi, sabbapāramīnaṃ pūritattā yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhāsi.
具念正知,从兜率天身死之后,入于母胎——如此,菩萨先圆满了一切巴拉密,那时便尽其寿量而住。而那些天神,当按人间的算法,七天后即将命终时,五种前相便会出现:花鬘枯萎,衣裳垢腻,腋下出汗,身上现出丑陋衰相,天神在自己的天座上坐不安稳。巴利
Sato sampajāno tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamatīti evaṃ tāva sabbapāramiyo pūretvā tadā bodhisatto yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Devatānaṃ pana – ‘‘manussagaṇanāvasena idāni sattahi divasehi cuti bhavissatī’’ti pañca pubbanimittāni uppajjanti – mālā milāyanti, vatthāni kilissanti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, kāye dubbaṇṇiyaṃ okkamati, devo devāsane na saṇṭhāti.
这里,“花鬘”是指投生结生那天所佩戴的装饰花环。据说这些花环在五十七俱胝又六百万年里都不枯萎,到那时才枯萎。衣服也是这样。在这么长的时间里,天人们既不觉得冷也不觉得热,到那时身上却一滴滴地冒出汗水。在这么长的时间里,他们身上也看不出牙齿缺损、头发变白等衰败之相,天女看起来像十六岁的少女,天子看起来像二十岁的青年。但临死时,他们的身体会显出疲惫的样子。在这么长的时间里,他们在天界从来不会感到厌倦,可临死时却会叹气、伸懒腰,对自己的座位也待不住了。巴利
Tattha mālāti paṭisandhiggahaṇadivase piḷandhanamālā. Tā kira saṭṭhisatasahassādhikā sattapaṇṇāsa-vassakoṭiyo amilāyitvā tadā milāyanti. Vatthesupi eseva nayo. Ettakaṃ pana kālaṃ devānaṃ neva sītaṃ na uṇhaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ kāle sarīrato bindubinduvasena sedā muccanti. Ettakañca kālaṃ tesaṃ sarīre khaṇḍiccapāliccādivasena vivaṇṇatā na paññāyati, devadhītā soḷasavassuddesikā viya, devaputtā vīsativassuddesikā viya khāyanti. Maraṇakāle pana nesaṃ kilantarūpo attabhāvo hoti. Ettakañca nesaṃ kālaṃ devaloke ukkaṇṭhitā nāma natthi, maraṇakāle pana nissasanti vijambhanti, sake āsane nābhiramanti.
这些前兆,就像在人间,只有大福德的人——比如国王、大臣这些人——才会出现流星坠落、地震、月食之类的征兆,并非所有人都能见到;同样,这些征兆也只在大威德的天人身上出现,并非所有天人都能见到。又像在人间,只有占星师这类人才懂得前兆,并非所有人都懂;同样,那些征兆也并非所有天人都知道,只有智者才知道。其中,那些由微弱的善业投生为天子的天人,当这些征兆出现时,会害怕地想:“现在谁知道我们会投生到哪里去呢?”而那些大福德的天人则想:“靠着我们布施的施物、持守的戒律、修习的禅修,我们将享受上界天界的福报。”他们不害怕。菩萨见到这些前兆,也不害怕,心想:“我在下一世就会成佛。”当这些征兆出现时,一万个世界中的天人聚集起来,恳求说:“诸位,您圆满十巴拉密,不是为了求取帝释天神的福报、魔罗的福报、梵天的福报、转轮王的福报,而是为了度脱世间才求成佛。诸位,现在正是您成佛的时候了,诸位,现在正是您成佛的时候了。”巴利
Imāni pana pubbanimittāni, yathā loke mahāpuññānaṃ rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃyeva ukkāpātabhūmicālacandaggāhādīni nimittāni paññāyanti, na sabbesaṃ, evameva mahesakkhānaṃ devatānaṃyeva paññāyanti, na sabbesaṃ. Yathā ca manussesu pubbanimittāni nakkhattapāṭhakādayova jānanti, na sabbe, evameva tānipi sabbe devā na jānanti, paṇḍitā eva pana jānanti. Tattha ye ca mandena kusalakammena nibbattā devaputtā, te tesu uppannesu – ‘‘idāni ko jānāti, kuhiṃ nibbattissāmā’’ti bhāyanti. Ye mahāpuññā, te – ‘‘amhehi dinnaṃ dānaṃ rakkhitaṃ sīlaṃ bhāvitaṃ bhāvanaṃ āgamma uparidevalokesu sampattiṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti na bhāyanti. Bodhisattopi tāni pubbanimittāni disvā ‘‘idāni anantare attabhāve buddho bhavissāmī’’ti na bhāyi. Athassa tesu nimittesu pātubhūtesu dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatā sannipatitvā – ‘‘mārisa tumhehi dasa pāramiyo pūrentehi na sakkasampattiṃ na mārabrahmacakkavattisampattiṃ patthentehi pūritā, lokanittharaṇatthāya pana buddhattaṃ patthayamānehi pūritā. So vo idāni kālo mārisa buddhattāya, samayo mārisa buddhattāyā’’ti yācanti.
这时,大士没有先答应天人们的请求,而是按时间、洲、处所、家族、生母和寿命限度这六个方面,作了所谓的五大观察。其中,他先观察时间:“现在是应时,还是非应时?”在这里,人寿超过十万年的时期不算应时。为什么呢?因为那时众生的生、老、死都不明显,而诸佛说法又必定不离三相;如果对他们讲无常、苦、无我,他们会想:“这是在说什么?”既不肯听,也不肯信,因此不能生起现观;没有现观,教法就不能导向出离。所以那不是应时。人寿少于百年的时期也不算应时。为什么呢?因为那时众生烦恼炽盛,对烦恼炽盛的人给予教诫,教诫不能在他们心中站住,就像在水面上划线条一样,很快就消失了。所以那也不是应时。而从十万年以下、百年以上,这段寿命时期才算应时。当时正好是人寿百年的时期。于是大士观察到“这是应当受生的时间”,便确定了时间。巴利
Atha mahāsatto devatānaṃ paṭiññaṃ adatvāva kāladīpadesakulajanettiāyuparicchedavasena pañcamahāvilokanaṃ nāma vilokesi. Tattha ‘‘kālo nu kho, na kālo’’ti paṭhamaṃ kālaṃ vilokesi. Tattha vassasatasahassato uddhaṃ vaḍḍhitaāyukālo kālo nāma na hoti. Kasmā? Tadā hi sattānaṃ jātijarāmaraṇāni na paññāyanti, buddhānañca dhammadesanā nāma tilakkhaṇamuttā natthi, tesaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti kathentānaṃ ‘‘kiṃ nāmetaṃ kathentī’’ti neva sotuṃ na saddhātuṃ maññanti, tato abhisamayo na hoti, tasmiṃ asati aniyyānikaṃ sāsanaṃ hoti. Tasmā so akālo. Vassasatato ūnaāyukālopi kālo nāma na hoti. Kasmā? Tadā hi sattā ussannakilesā honti, ussannakilesānañca dinnovādo ovādaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati. Udake daṇḍarāji viya khippaṃ vigacchati. Tasmā sopi akālo. Satasahassato pana paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā vassasatato paṭṭhāya uddhaṃ āyukālo kālo nāma. Tadā ca vassasatakālo hoti. Atha mahāsatto ‘‘nibbattitabbakālo’’ti kālaṃ passi.
随后他观察洲岛,看到四大洲连同各自的附属小岛,便想:佛陀不会在另外三洲出现,只会出现在赡部洲。这样,他就确定了洲岛。巴利
Tato dīpaṃ vilokento saparivāre cattāro dīpe oloketvā – ‘‘tīsu dīpesu buddhā na nibbattanti, jambudīpeyeva nibbattantī’’ti dīpaṃ passi.
随后,他观察地点:“赡部洲很大,方圆一万由旬,诸佛到底出现在哪个地方呢?”观察时,他看到了中部地区。所谓中部地区,按律典里说的“东方有个叫伽姜伽罗的村落”等等那样。它的长度是三百由旬,宽度是二百五十由旬,周围是九百由旬。就在这片地方,有人圆满四阿僧祇、八阿僧祇或十六阿僧祇及十万劫的巴拉密后,成为正自觉者而出现。有人圆满二阿僧祇及十万劫的巴拉密后,成为独觉佛而出现;有人圆满一阿僧祇及十万劫的巴拉密后,成为舍利弗、目犍连等大声闻而出现;四大洲及二千小洲的统治者转轮王出现;还有其他有大势力的刹帝利、婆罗门、居士大富者出现。而在这里,有一座名叫迦毗罗卫的城市,他想:“我应当投生在那里。”巴利
Tato – ‘‘jambudīpo nāma mahā, dasayojanasahassaparimāṇo, katarasmiṃ nu kho padese buddhā nibbattantī’’ti desaṃ vilokento majjhimadesaṃ passi. Majjhimadeso nāma ‘‘puratthimāya disāya gajaṅgalaṃ nāma nigamo’’tiādinā nayena vinaye (mahāva. 259) vuttova. So pana āyāmato tīṇi yojanasatāni. Vitthārato aḍḍhatiyāni, parikkhepato navayojanasatānīti. Etasmiñhi padese cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyāni, kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambuddhā uppajjanti. Dve asaṅkhyeyyāni, kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā paccekabuddhā uppajjanti, ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ, kappasatasahassañca pāramiyo pūretvā sāriputtamoggallānādayo mahāsāvakā uppajjanti, catunnaṃ mahādīpānaṃ dvisahassānaṃ parittadīpānañca issariyādhipaccakārakacakkavattirājāno uppajjanti, aññe ca mahesakkhā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatimahāsālā uppajjanti. Idañcettha kapilavatthu nāma nagaraṃ, tattha mayā nibbattitabbanti niṭṭhamagamāsi.
接着他观察家族:“诸佛总是出生在世间公认的家族里。如今刹帝利家族是世间公认的,我要投生到那里,净饭王将成为我的父亲。”这样观察了家族。巴利
Tato kulaṃ vilokento – ‘‘buddhā nāma lokasammate kule nibbattanti, idāni ca khattiyakulaṃ lokasammataṃ, tattha nibbattissāmi, suddhodano nāma rājā me pitā bhavissatī’’ti kulaṃ passi.
接着,他观察母亲:“佛陀的母亲不会轻浮放逸,也不会酗酒。她从百千劫以来圆满巴拉密,从出生起就持守不破的五戒。这位摩诃摩耶王后正是这样的人,她将成为我的母亲。那她的寿命还有多长呢?”他这样作意观察后,看到:“在十个月零七天之后。”巴利
Tato mātaraṃ vilokento – ‘‘buddhamātā nāma lolā surādhuttā na hoti, kappasatasahassaṃ pūritapāramī jātito paṭṭhāya akhaṇḍapañcasīlā hoti, ayañca mahāmāyā nāma devī edisā. Ayaṃ me mātā bhavissati. Kittakaṃ panassā āyū’’ti āvajjanto – ‘‘dasannaṃ māsānaṃ upari satta divasānī’’ti passi.
他这样完成五种大观察之后,心想:“诸位贤友,我成佛的时机到了。”为了摄受天神们,他先答应了他们,然后说:“你们去吧。”就这样把那些天神打发走了。随后,他在兜率天神的围绕下,进入兜率天城中的欢喜园。其实,一切天界都有欢喜园。在那里,天神们围着他,提醒他过去所造善业的机缘,说着:“从这里命终后,愿你得生善趣!从这里命终后,愿你得生善趣!”他就在天神们这样提醒善业的围绕中,在园里游走时命终了。巴利
Iti imaṃ pañcamahāvilokanaṃ viloketvā – ‘‘kālo me mārisā buddhabhāvāyā’’ti devatānaṃ saṅgahaṃ karonto paṭiññaṃ datvā ‘‘gacchatha tumhe’’ti tā devatā uyyojetvā tusitadevatāhi parivuto tusitapure nandanavanaṃ pāvisi. Sabbadevalokesu hi nandanavanaṃ atthiyeva. Tattha naṃ devatā – ‘‘ito cuto sugatiṃ gaccha, ito cuto sugatiṃ gacchā’’ti pubbekatakusalakammokāsaṃ sārayamānā vicaranti. So evaṃ devatāhi kusalaṃ sārayamānāhi parivuto tattha vicarantova cavi.
他这样知道“我死了,我正在死去”,但不知道死心。即使已经结生,也不知道结生心,但他这样知道“我在这个地方结生了”。不过有些长老说:“应该承认有一种叫‘转向方式’的东西,他会在第二或第三心路过程才知道。”三藏大希瓦长老则说:“大士们的结生和其他人的结生不一样,他们的正念正知已经达到顶点。但因为不能用同一个心去了知那个心,所以不知道死心。在死的那一刹那,他知道‘我死了,我正在死去’;即使已经结生,也不知道结生心,但知道‘我在某个地方结生了’。那个时候,一万个世界震动。”这样具足正念正知、入母胎时,他在十九种结生心里,以与慈心前分相似、与喜俱行、与智相应、无行的善心相似的大异熟心结了生。但大希瓦长老说:“是以与舍俱行的心结生的。”巴利
Evaṃ cuto cavāmīti pajānāti, cuticittaṃ na jānāti. Paṭisandhiṃ gahetvāpi paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānāti, imasmiṃ me ṭhāne paṭisandhi gahitāti evaṃ pana jānāti. Keci pana therā ‘‘āvajjanapariyāyo nāma laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, dutiyatatiyacittavāreyeva jānissatī’’ti vadanti. Tipiṭakamahāsīvatthero panāha – ‘‘mahāsattānaṃ paṭisandhi na aññesaṃ paṭisandhisadisā, koṭippattaṃ tesaṃ satisampajaññaṃ. Yasmā pana teneva cittena taṃ cittaṃ ñātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā cuticittaṃ na jānāti. Cutikkhaṇepi cavāmīti pajānāti, paṭisandhiṃ gahetvāpi paṭisandhicittaṃ na jānāti, asukasmiṃ ṭhāne paṭisandhi gahitāti pajānāti, tasmiṃ kāle dasasahassī kampatī’’ti. Evaṃ sato sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamanto pana ekūnavīsatiyā paṭisandhicittesu mettāpubbabhāgassa somanassa-sahagata-ñāṇasampayutta-asaṅkhārika-kusalacittassa sadisamahāvipākacittena paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatenā’’ti āha.
菩萨入胎时,是在阿沙陀月满月日,依北阿沙陀星宿入胎。据说那时,摩诃摩耶从满月前第七天开始,就享受远离饮酒、佩戴花鬘香粉装饰的星宿庆典。到第七天清晨,她起身用香水沐浴,佩戴好一切装饰,享用殊胜美食,受持伍波萨他戒,然后进入寝宫,躺在殊胜的床榻上。就在她入睡时,做了这样一个梦:四位大王连同床座一起把她抬起,带到阿耨达池边,放在一旁。接着天王的妃子们前来,为了去除她身上人间的污垢而为她沐浴,给她穿上天衣,涂上香料,佩戴天界的花。然后不远处有一座银山,山中有座金殿。她们让她头朝东躺下。这时,菩萨化作一头殊胜的白象,在附近一座金山上游走,然后从金山下来,登上银山,从北方过来,进入金殿,右绕母亲后,像破开右胁一样,进入母胎。巴利
Paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanto pana āsāḷhīpuṇṇamāyaṃ uttarāsāḷhanakkhattena aggahesi. Tadā kira mahāmāyā pure puṇṇamāya sattamadivasato paṭṭhāya vigatasurāpānaṃ mālāgandhavibhūsanasampannaṃ nakkhattakīḷaṃ anubhavamānā sattame divase pāto vuṭṭhāya gandhodakena nhāyitvā sabbālaṅkāravibhūsitā varabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā uposathaṅgāni adhiṭṭhāya sirīgabbhaṃ pavisitvā sirīsayane nipannā niddaṃ okkamamānā idaṃ supinaṃ addasa – ‘‘cattāro kira naṃ mahārājāno sayaneneva saddhiṃ ukkhipitvā anotattadahaṃ netvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Atha nesaṃ deviyo āgantvā manussamalaharaṇatthaṃ nhāpetvā dibbavatthaṃ nivāsetvā gandhehi vilimpetvā dibbapupphāni piḷandhitvā tato avidūre rajatapabbato, tassa anto kanakavimānaṃ atthi, tasmiṃ pācīnato sīsaṃ katvā nipajjāpesuṃ. Atha bodhisatto setavaravāraṇo hutvā tato avidūre eko suvaṇṇapabbato, tattha caritvā tato oruyha rajatapabbataṃ abhiruhitvā uttaradisato āgamma kanakavimānaṃ pavisitvā mātaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dakkhiṇapassaṃ phāletvā kucchiṃ paviṭṭhasadiso ahosi.
这时,醒来的王后把这个梦告诉了国王。天亮后,国王召来大约六十四位婆罗门首领,让人把地面涂上牛粪,撒上米花等物作吉祥供养,铺设了极其贵重的座位。等婆罗门们在那里坐下,国王把用酥油、蜂蜜、糖等精心做成的上等乳粥盛满金盘银盘,又用金盘银盘盖好,送给他们;还用没穿过的新衣、母牛等布施,让他们心满意足。等他们一切所求都得到满足后,国王把那个梦告诉他们,问道:“会怎么样呢?”婆罗门们说:“大王,不必担心。王后腹中已经怀上了胎儿,而且是男胎,不是女胎,您会得到一个儿子。他如果留在家中,就会成为转轮王;如果离家出家,就会成为破除世间一切遮蔽的佛陀。”菩萨就是这样具念正知,从兜率天身殁,进入母胎。巴利
Atha pabuddhā devī taṃ supinaṃ rañño ārocesi. Rājā pabhātāya rattiyā catusaṭṭhimatte brāhmaṇapāmokkhe pakkosāpetvā haritūpalittāya lājādīhi katamaṅgalasakkārāya bhūmiyā mahārahāni āsanāni paññāpetvā tattha nisinnānaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ sappimadhusakkarābhisaṅkhārassa varapāyāsassa suvaṇṇarajatapātiyo pūretvā suvaṇṇarajatapātītiheva paṭikujjitvā adāsi, aññehi ca ahatavatthakapilagāvīdānādīhi te santappesi. Atha nesaṃ sabbakāmasantappitānaṃ supinaṃ ārocāpetvā – ‘‘kiṃ bhavissatī’’ti pucchi. Brāhmaṇā āhaṃsu – ‘‘mā cintayi mahārāja, deviyā te kucchimhi gabbho patiṭṭhito, so ca kho purisagabbho, na itthigabbho, putto te bhavissati. So sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasissati, rājā bhavissati cakkavattī. Sace agārā nikkhamma pabbajissati, buddho bhavissati loke vivaṭṭacchado’’ti. Evaṃ sato sampajāno bodhisatto tusitakāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamati.
在这里,“具念、正知”这句话,是在说明他以第四种入胎方式入胎。因为入胎一共有四种。巴利
Tattha sato sampajānoti iminā catutthāya gabbhāvakkantiyā okkamatīti dasseti. Catasso hi gabbhāvakkantiyo.
尊者,有四种入胎。尊者,在这里,有些人不知不觉就进入母胎,不知不觉就住在母胎里,不知不觉就从母胎出来。这是第一种入胎。巴利
‘‘Catasso imā, bhante, gabbhāvakkantiyo. Idha, bhante, ekacco asampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti.
尊者,另外还有一种情况:这里有人清清楚楚地进入母胎,却糊里糊涂地住在母胎里,又糊里糊涂地从母胎出来。这就是第二种入胎。巴利
Puna caparaṃ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, asampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ dutiyā gabbhāvakkanti.
尊者,另外还有一种情况:这里有人清清楚楚地进入母胎,清清楚楚地住在母胎里,却糊里糊涂地从母胎出来。这就是第三种入胎。巴利
Puna caparaṃ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, asampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ tatiyā gabbhāvakkanti.
另外,尊者,在这里有一种人,入母胎时保持正知,住在母胎中时保持正知,从母胎出来时也保持正知。这就是第四种入胎。巴利
Puna caparaṃ, bhante, idhekacco sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamati, sampajāno mātukucchismiṃ ṭhāti, sampajāno mātukucchimhā nikkhamati, ayaṃ catutthā gabbhāvakkantī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.147).
这四种入胎里,第一种是世间凡夫的入胎,第二种是八十位大弟子的入胎,第三种是两位上首弟子和独觉佛的入胎。据说,那些人被业力所产生的风推着,头朝下、脚朝上,就像掉进几百人高的悬崖,又像大象要穿过钥匙孔一样,从极其狭窄的产道出来,遭受无边的痛苦。因此,他们没有“我正在出生”这种清楚的了知。第四种是一切智菩萨的入胎。他们在母胎中结生时就知道,住在母胎里时也知道。出胎的时候,业力所产生的风也没法把他们头朝下、脚朝上地抛出去,他们伸出双手、睁开眼睛,站着就出生了。巴利
Etāsu paṭhamā lokiyamanussānaṃ hoti, dutiyā asītimahāsāvakānaṃ, tatiyā dvinnaṃ aggasāvakānaṃ paccekabodhisattānañca. Te kira kammajavātehi uddhaṃpādā adhosirā anekasataporise papāte viya yonimukhe tāḷacchiggalena hatthī viya ativiya sambādhena yonimukhena nikkhamamānā anantaṃ dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti. Tena nesaṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nikkhamāmā’’ti sampajānatā na hoti. Catutthā sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ. Te hi mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantāpi jānanti, tattha vasantāpi jānanti. Nikkhamanakālepi nesaṃ kammajavātā uddhaṃpāde adhosire katvā khipituṃ na sakkonti, dve hatthe pasāretvā akkhīni ummīletvā ṭhitakāva nikkhamanti.
201 201. “入母胎”在这里的意思是已进入母胎的状态。因为只有在已经入胎之后才会这样,而不是正在入胎的时候。“无量”是指以佛陀为尺度,也就是广大的意思。“广大”是它的同义词。“天威神力”在这里指天神的威神力:所穿衣服的光明遍照十二由旬,身体的光明、装饰的光明、宫殿的光明也同样如此,意思是超越了这个范围。巴利
201.Mātukucchiṃ okkamatīti ettha mātukucchiṃ okkanto hotīti attho. Okkante hi tasmiṃ evaṃ hoti, na okkamamāne. Appamāṇoti buddhappamāṇo, vipuloti attho. Uḷāroti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Devānubhāvanti ettha devānaṃ ayamānubhāvo – nivatthavatthassa pabhā dvādasa yojanāni pharati, tathā sarīrassa, tathā alaṅkārassa, tathā vimānassa, taṃ atikkamitvāti attho.
所谓“世界中间”,就是每三个轮围世界之间有一个世界中间地狱,好比三个车轮或三片相互抵靠的叶片中间的空隙。那个世界中间地狱的大小是八千由旬。它恒常敞开,没有遮蔽,下方也没有可依托之处。它是一片黑暗,因为阻碍了眼识的生起,所以带着使人失明的幽暗。据说在那里眼识不会生起。说日月天子有大神力,是因为据说他们一刹那间就能同时出现在三个洲上,所以有这样的神力。他们能向每一个方向驱散九十九个十万由旬的黑暗,显现光明,如此具有大威力。说他们无法照到,是因为他们以自己的光明无法照到。据说他们行于轮围山之间,而世界中间地狱在轮围山之外,因此他们在那里无法以光明照到。巴利
Lokantarikāti tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antarā ekeko lokantarikā hoti, tiṇṇaṃ sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā aññamaññaṃ āhacca ṭhapitānaṃ majjhe okāso viya. So pana lokantarikanirayo parimāṇato aṭṭhayojanasahasso hoti. Aghāti niccavivaṭā. Asaṃvutāti heṭṭhāpi appatiṭṭhā. Andhakārāti tamabhūtā. Andhakāratimisāti cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇato andhabhāvakaraṇatimisena samannāgatā. Tattha kira cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati. Evaṃmahiddhikāti candimasūriyā kira ekappahāreneva tīsu dīpesu paññāyanti, evaṃmahiddhikā. Ekekāya disāya navanavayojanasatasahassāni andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dassenti, evaṃ mahānubhāvā. Ābhāyanānubhontīti attano pabhāya nappahonti. Te kira cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena caranti, cakkavāḷapabbatañca atikkamma lokantarikanirayo, tasmā te tattha ābhāya nappahonti.
那些投生在那里的众生,指的是投生在那个世界中间大地狱里的众生。那么,他们是造了什么业才投生到那里去的呢?他们对父母和如法的沙门、婆罗门犯下严重而残酷的罪过,又日复一日地做杀生等凶暴之事,因此投生到那里,就像铜掌岛上的无畏贼、龙贼之类的人一样。他们的身体有三俱卢舍那么大,长着像蝙蝠一样的长指甲。他们像蝙蝠攀在树上那样,用指甲钩住轮围山的山脚。当他们蠕动爬行、彼此靠近到伸手可及的距离时,就以为“我们找到食物了”,于是挤在那里翻滚挣扎,掉进支撑世界的水中。狂风吹打之下,他们像甘草果一样被吹断,落入水中。刚一落水,就在极咸的水里像面团一样完全消融。巴利
Yepi tattha sattāti yepi tasmiṃ lokantaramahāniraye sattā upapannā. Kiṃ pana kammaṃ katvā te tattha uppajjantīti? Bhāriyaṃ dāruṇaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañca upari aparādhaṃ aññañca divase divase pāṇavadhādisāhasikakammaṃ katvā uppajjanti tambapaṇṇidīpe abhayacoranāgacorādayo viya. Tesaṃ attabhāvo tigāvutiko hoti, vaggulīnaṃ viya dīghanakhā honti. Te rukkhe vagguliyo viya nakhehi cakkavāḷapāde lagganti. Yadā pana saṃsappantā aññamaññassa hatthapāsaṃ gatā honti, atha ‘‘bhakkho no laddho’’ti maññamānā tattha vāvaṭā viparivattitvā lokasandhārakaudake patanti. Vāte paharante madhukaphalāni viya chijjitvā udake patanti. Patitamattā ca accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍi viya vilīyanti.
据说,还有其他众生呢,贤友们——他们在这一天彼此看见后就这样想:“就像我们正在承受巨大的痛苦一样,据说还有其他众生也正在承受这种苦,投生到了这里。”不过,这种光明连喝一碗粥的时间都维持不了,最多也就是从睡着到醒来、看清所缘那么短的时间。但长部诵者说:“就像闪电一样,只一闪,弹指之间就消失了,在他们刚说出‘这是什么’的时候就不见了。”震动,就是四周都在震动。另外两个词只是前一个的同义词。接下来“无量”等话,是为了总结而说的。巴利
Aññepi kira bho santi sattāti – ‘‘yathā mayaṃ mahādukkhaṃ anubhavāma, evaṃ aññepi kira sattā idaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavantā idhūpapannā’’ti taṃ divasaṃ passanti. Ayaṃ pana obhāso ekayāgupānamattampi na tiṭṭhati, yāvatā niddāyitvā pabuddho ārammaṇaṃ vibhāveti, tattakaṃ kālaṃ hoti. Dīghabhāṇakā pana ‘‘accharāsaṅghāṭamattameva vijjubhāso viya niccharitvā kiṃ idanti bhaṇantānaṃyeva antaradhāyatī’’ti vadanti. Saṅkampatīti samantato kampati. Itaradvayaṃ purimapasseva vevacanaṃ. Puna appamāṇo cātiādi nigamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
202 “四位天子从四方前来守护”这句话里说的“四位”,是就四大王来说的;不过在整个一万个轮围世界里,每个轮围世界各有四位,合起来就是四十万位。在我们这个轮围世界里,四大王手持宝剑前来,为了守护菩萨而进入吉祥胎室;其余的天王则从胎门那里开始,把来捣乱的尘埃鬼、毗舍遮等夜叉众赶走,一直守护到轮围山的边界。巴利
202.Cattāro devaputtā catuddisaṃ ārakkhāya upagacchantīti ettha cattāroti catunnaṃ mahārājūnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, dasasahassacakkavāḷe pana cattāro cattāro katvā cattālīsadasasahassā honti. Tattha imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe mahārājāno khaggahatthā āgantvā bodhisattassa ārakkhaṇatthāya upagantvā sirīgabbhaṃ paviṭṭhā, itare gabbhadvārato paṭṭhāya avaruddhapaṃsupisācakādiyakkhagaṇe paṭikkamāpetvā yāva cakkavāḷā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhiṃsu.
那么,这个守护到底是为了什么目的呢?难道不是在结生的那一刹那,从羯罗蓝阶段开始,即使有一万亿的魔罗举起一万亿座须弥山,前来障碍菩萨或菩萨的母亲,他们也都会在半途中就消失吗?世尊在《血生起事》中也这样说过:“诸比丘,这是不可能的,没有这样的机会,有人能靠外力夺走如来的性命。诸比丘,如来是因自然原因而入般涅槃的。诸比丘,你们各自回住处去吧,诸比丘,如来不需要守护。”因此,确实不存在他人加害而令他们命终的障碍。不过,有些非人相貌丑陋、面目可憎,还有些鸟形貌恐怖,菩萨的母亲看到它们的形貌或听到它们的声音时,可能会生起恐惧或惊慌。正是为了阻挡这些,他们才采取了守护。而且,他们是因为菩萨的福德威力而生起恭敬,被自己的恭敬心所驱使,才这样做的。巴利
Kimatthaṃ panāyaṃ rakkhā āgatā? Nanu paṭisandhikkhaṇe kalalakālato paṭṭhāya sacepi koṭisatasahassā mārā koṭisatasahassaṃ sineruṃ ukkhipitvā bodhisattassa vā bodhisattamātuyā vā antarāyakaraṇatthaṃ āgaccheyyuṃ, sabbe antarāva antaradhāyeyyuṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā ruhiruppādavatthusmiṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ parūpakkamena tathāgataṃ jīvitā voropeyya. Anupakkamena, bhikkhave, tathāgatā parinibbāyanti. Gacchatha tumhe, bhikkhave, yathāvihāraṃ, arakkhiyā, bhikkhave, tathāgatā’’ti (cūḷava. 341). Evametaṃ, na parūpakkamena tesaṃ jīvitantarāyo atthi. Santi kho pana amanussā virūpā duddasikā, bheravarupā pakkhino, yesaṃ rūpaṃ disvā saddaṃ vā sutvā bodhisattamātu bhayaṃ vā santāso vā uppajjeyya, tesaṃ nivāraṇatthāya rakkhaṃ aggahesuṃ. Apica kho bodhisattassa puññatejena sañjātagāravā attano gāravacoditāpi te evamakaṃsu.
那么,这四大天王进入胎室安住之后,会不会让菩萨的母亲看见他们呢?在沐浴、打扮、吃饭等身体活动的时候,他们不现身;但当菩萨的母亲进入吉祥的胎室、躺在殊胜的床座上时,他们就现身。在这里,虽说人类见到非人通常会感到恐惧,但菩萨的母亲凭着自己和儿子的福德威力,见到他们并不害怕,心里对他们生起的感受,就像对王宫里平常的侍卫一样。巴利
Kiṃ pana te antogabbhaṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā cattāro mahārājāno bodhisattamātuyā attānaṃ dassenti na dassentīti? Nahānamaṇḍanabhojanādisarīrakiccakāle na dassenti, sirīgabbhaṃ pavisitvā varasayane nipannakāle pana dassenti. Tattha kiñcāpi amanussadassanaṃ nāma manussānaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ hoti, bodhisattamātā pana attano ceva puttassa ca puññānubhāvena te disvā na bhāyati, pakatiantepurapālakesu viya assā tesu cittaṃ uppajjati.
203 “本性具戒”,是说她天生就戒行圆满。据说,在佛陀还没有出世的时代,人们会到苦行者和游行者面前,先礼敬,再蹲坐着受戒;菩萨的母亲也曾到迦罗迭瓦拉仙人那里受戒。可是,当菩萨入胎之后,她就不可能再坐到别人脚下去;即使与人同座受戒,那也只是构成轻慢的缘由而已。所以说,她是自己受持了戒。巴利
203.Pakatiyāsīlavatīti sabhāveneva sīlasampannā. Anuppanne kira buddhe manussā tāpasaparibbājakānaṃ santike vanditvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā sīlaṃ gaṇhanti, bodhisattamātāpi kāladevilassa isino santike gaṇhāti. Bodhisatte pana kucchigate aññassa pādamūle nisīdituṃ nāma na sakkā, samāsane nisīditvā gahitasīlampi avaññā kāraṇamattaṃ hoti. Tasmā sayameva sīlaṃ aggahesīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“于诸男子”这句话是说:对以菩萨的父亲为首的一些男子,不会生起以男子为对象的欲贪心。而且这是出于对菩萨的敬重,并不是因为她的烦恼已经断尽。至于菩萨母亲的容貌,就算是极为善巧的画师,也无法在画布等物上画出来;见到这样的容貌,若说男子不会生起贪欲,那是说不通的。不过,如果有人怀着贪染心想要靠近她,他的双脚就会走不动,像被天神的锁链捆住一样。因此才说她是“不可逾越的”等等。巴利
Purisesūti bodhisattassa pitaraṃ ādiṃ katvā kesuci manussesu purisādhippāyacittaṃ nuppajjati. Tañca kho bodhisatte gāravena, na pahīnakilesatāya. Bodhisattamātu rūpaṃ pana sukusalāpi sippikā potthakammādīsupi kātuṃ na sakkonti, taṃ disvā purisassa rāgo nuppajjatīti na sakkā vattuṃ. Sace pana taṃ rattacitto upasaṅkamitukāmo hoti, pādā na vahanti, dibbasaṅkhalikā viya bajjhanti. Tasmā ‘‘anatikkamanīyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
关于“五种欲乐”,前面讲“与欲乐相应”时,是就男子的意欲来说,说明了应当遮止的对象;这里则是说明欲乐所缘的获得。据说,当人们听到“王后怀上了这样一位儿子”的消息后,四面八方的国王们纷纷送来贵重的饰物、乐器等礼物,这些礼物就成了与五门相应的所缘对象。又因为菩萨和菩萨母亲所造之业极为广大,他们所得到的利养与恭敬,根本没有任何限度,无法衡量。巴利
Pañcannaṃ kāmaguṇānanti pubbe ‘‘kāmaguṇūpasaṃhita’’nti purisādhippāyavasena vatthupaṭikkhepo kathito, idha ārammaṇappaṭilābho dassito. Tadā kira ‘‘deviyā evarūpo putto kucchismiṃ uppanno’’ti, sutvā samantato rājāno mahagghaābharaṇatūriyādivasena pañcadvārārammaṇavatthubhūtaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ pesenti, bodhisattassa ca bodhisattamātuyā ca katakammassa ussannattā lābhasakkārassa pamāṇaparicchedo nāma natthi.
204 身体不疲倦,是说别的女人怀孕时会被胎儿的重担弄得疲惫,手脚浮肿等等,而菩萨的母亲完全没有这样的疲倦。胎儿透过腹部可见,就是指胎儿在腹中。已经过了羯罗蓝等最初阶段,长出了身体各部分和手脚,诸根完备无缺,她才能看见。看的目的是什么?是为了安乐地养护。就像母亲和儿子一起坐着或躺着时,为了儿子舒服而看着他,心想:“我要把他垂下来的手或脚抬起来放好。”同样,菩萨的母亲在起身、行走、转身、坐下的时候,以及在吃下热、冷、咸、苦、辣的食物时,会想:“我的儿子会不会因此不舒服?”她为了安乐地养护菩萨而看着他,便看见菩萨盘腿结跏趺坐。别的胎儿在母胎里,是压着直肠,顶着胃,把腹膜甩在背后,靠着脊柱,像下雨时躲在树洞里的猴子那样蹲着,两手托着下巴而坐。菩萨却不是这样。菩萨把脊柱甩在背后,像坐在法座上说法的法师一样,盘腿结跏趺坐,面朝东方。他过去所造的业净化了投生的基础,在清净的基础上,生出了极为细嫩的肤色。于是,腹中的皮肤遮不住他,母亲看的时候,就像他站在外面一样清清楚楚。为了用比喻说明这个道理,经文说“犹如……”等等。不过,菩萨在母胎中看不见母亲。因为在母胎里不会生起眼识。巴利
204.Akilantakāyāti yathā aññā itthiyo gabbhabhārena kilamanti, hatthapādā uddhumātakādīni pāpuṇanti, na evaṃ tassā koci kilamatho ahosi. Tirokucchigatanti antokucchigataṃ. Kalalādikālaṃ atikkamitvā sañjātaaṅgapaccaṅgaṃ ahīnindriyabhāvaṃ upagataṃyeva passati. Kimatthaṃ passati? Sukhavāsatthaṃ. Yatheva hi mātā puttena saddhiṃ nisinnā vā nipannā vā ‘‘hatthaṃ vā pādaṃ vā olambantaṃ ukkhipitvā saṇṭhapessāmī’’ti sukhavāsatthaṃ puttaṃ oloketi, evaṃ bodhisattamātāpi yaṃ taṃ mātu uṭṭhānagamanaparivattananisajjādīsu uṇhasītaloṇikatittakakaṭukāhāraajjhoharaṇakālesu ca gabbhassa dukkhaṃ uppajjati, atthi nu kho me taṃ puttassāti sukhavāsatthaṃ bodhisattaṃ olokayamānā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinnaṃ bodhisattaṃ passati. Yathā hi aññe antokucchigatā pakkāsayaṃ ajjhottharitvā āmāsayaṃ ukkhipitvā udarapaṭalaṃ piṭṭhito katvā piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ nissāya ukkuṭikā dvīsu muṭṭhīsu hanukaṃ ṭhapetvā deve vassante rukkhasusire makkaṭā viya nisīdanti, na evaṃ bodhisatto. Bodhisatto pana piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ piṭṭhito katvā dhammāsane dhammakathiko viya pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā puratthābhimukho nisīdati. Pubbe katakammaṃ panassā vatthuṃ sodheti, suddhe vatthumhi sukhumacchavilakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati . Atha naṃ kucchigataṃ taco paṭicchādetuṃ na sakkoti, olokentiyā bahi ṭhito viya paññāyati. Tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento seyyathāpītiādimāha. Bodhisatto pana antokucchigato mātaraṃ na passati. Na hi antokucchiyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjati.
205 “命终”并不是因为分娩的缘故,而纯粹是因为寿命已经耗尽。菩萨住过的地方,就像塔庙或塔房一样,别人不能受用;而且也不能把菩萨的母亲移开,另立别人做王后,所以菩萨母亲的寿命就只有那么长,因此她就在那时命终。那么她是在什么年纪命终的呢?是在中年。因为在青年时期,众生对自己身体的欲贪很强,因此那时怀孕的女人保不住胎儿,胎儿也多有病痛。而中年分为三个阶段,过了前两个阶段,到了第三个阶段时,母胎的基础变得清净;在清净的母胎中出生的孩子,是健康的。所以,菩萨的母亲也是先在青年时期享受了圆满的福乐,然后在中年的第三个阶段分娩,之后命终。巴利
205.Kālaṃkarotīti na vijātabhāvapaccayā, āyuparikkhayeneva. Bodhisattena vasitaṭṭhānañhi cetiyakuṭisadisaṃ hoti aññesaṃ aparibhogaṃ, na ca sakkā bodhisattamātaraṃ apanetvā aññaṃ aggamahesiṭṭhāne ṭhapetunti tattakaṃyeva bodhisattamātu āyuppamāṇaṃ hoti, tasmā tadā kālaṃ karoti. Katarasmiṃ pana vaye kālaṃ karotīti? Majjhimavaye. Paṭhamavayasmiñhi sattānaṃ attabhāve chandarāgo balavā hoti, tena tadā sañjātagabbhā itthī taṃ gabbhaṃ anurakkhituṃ na sakkonti, gabbho bahvābādho hoti. Majjhimavayassa pana dve koṭṭhāse atikkamma tatiyakoṭṭhāse vatthuṃ visadaṃ hoti, visade vatthumhi nibbattā dārakā arogā honti. Tasmā bodhisattamātāpi paṭhamavaye sampattiṃ anubhavitvā majjhimavayassa tatiyakoṭṭhāse vijāyitvā kālaṃ karoti.
“九或十”这里,“或”这个字表示一种选择性的涵盖,应当知道它也统摄了七或八、十一或十二等这些情况。其中,七个月出生的能活下来,但受不了冷热。八个月出生的活不下来,其余月份出生的都能活。巴利
Nava vā dasa vāti ettha vā-saddena vikappanavasena satta vā aṭṭha vā ekādasa vā dvādasa vāti evamādīnampi saṅgaho veditabbo. Tattha sattamāsajāto jīvati, sītuṇhakkhamo pana na hoti. Aṭṭhamāsajāto na jīvati, sesā jīvanti.
“站立着”就是保持站立的状态。摩诃摩耶临产时,向国王禀告说:“我要去亲戚家族之家。”国王便命人把从迦毗罗卫城通往天臂城的大道装饰一新,让夫人坐上金轿。全城的释迦族人都跟随护送,用香、花等供养,簇拥着夫人前行。夫人看到离天臂城不远的蓝毗尼娑罗林园,生起了游园之心,便告知国王。国王于是命人修整园林,布置守卫。夫人刚进入园林,就感到身体虚弱,于是众人在吉祥娑罗树下为她铺设吉祥卧具,围起帷幕。她走进帷幕,手攀娑罗树枝,站立在那里。就在那一刹那,她便分娩了。巴利
Ṭhitāvāti ṭhitāva hutvā. Mahāmāyāpi devī upavijaññā ñātikulagharaṃ gamissāmīti rañño ārocesi. Rājā kapilavatthuto devadahanagaragāmimaggaṃ alaṅkārāpetvā deviṃ suvaṇṇasivikāya nisīdāpesi. Sakalanagaravāsino sakyā parivāretvā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā deviṃ gahetvā pāyiṃsu. Sā devadahanagarassa avidūre lumbinisālavanuyyānaṃ disvā uyyānavicaraṇatthāya cittaṃ uppādetvā rañño saññaṃ adāsi. Rājā uyyānaṃ paṭijaggāpetvā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahāpesi. Deviyā uyyānaṃ paviṭṭhamattāya kāyadubbalyaṃ ahosi, athassā maṅgalasālamūle sirīsayanaṃ paññāpetvā sāṇiyā parikkhipiṃsu. Sā antosāṇiṃ pavisitvā sālasākhaṃ hatthena gahetvā aṭṭhāsi. Athassā tāvadeva gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi.
天神们首先接取他,这里说的是诸漏尽的净居梵天神们来接取。怎么接取呢?有些人说,他们是化作接生婆的样子来接的。但这种说法被否定了,正确的说法是这样的:当时菩萨的母亲穿着镶金的衣服,外面披着像鱼眼一样细密的细白布,一直垂到脚边,站在那里。然后她非常轻松地生下了孩子,就像水从滤水器中流出来一样。接着那些梵天神以他们原本的梵天神形貌走上前来,先用金网接住。人们又从他们手中用细布垫接过来。所以经中说:天神们先接取他,然后人们才接取。巴利
Devā naṃ paṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhantīti khīṇāsavā suddhāvāsabrahmāno paṭiggaṇhanti. Kathaṃ? Sūtivesaṃ gaṇhitvāti eke. Taṃ pana paṭikkhipitvā idaṃ vuttaṃ – tadā bodhisattamātā suvaṇṇakhacitaṃ vatthaṃ nivāsetvā macchakkhisadisaṃ dukūlapaṭaṃ yāva pādantāva pārupitvā aṭṭhāsi. Athassā sallahukaṃ gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ ahosi dhammakaraṇato udakanikkhamanasadisaṃ. Atha te pakatibrahmaveseneva upasaṅkamitvā paṭhamaṃ suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggahesuṃ. Tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘devā naṃ paṭhamaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti pacchā manussā’’ti.
206 “四位天子”就是指四大天王。“接取”是指用羚羊皮垫子来接。“大威德者”是说有大威力、大名望、具足相好,这就是它的意思。巴利
206.Cattāro naṃ devaputtāti cattāro mahārājāno. Paṭiggahetvāti ajinappaveṇiyā paṭiggahetvā. Mahesakkhoti mahātejo mahāyaso lakkhaṇasampannoti attho.
“清净地出来”的意思是:别的众生卡在产道里,被挤得支离破碎才出来,他不是那样出来的,而是毫无黏着地出来。“以水”就是用水的意思。“不被任何不净物沾污”是说:别的众生被业生风抛掷,头朝下脚朝上地塞进产道,就像坠入百人深的悬崖地狱,又像被从钥匙孔里硬拽出来的大象,遭受极大痛苦,出来时全身涂满种种不净物;菩萨不是这样。业生风根本无法让菩萨头朝下脚朝上。他就像从法座上走下来的说法师,又像从梯子上走下来的人,伸展双手双脚,站着就从母胎出来了,完全没有沾上母胎里任何不净物。巴利
Visadova nikkhamatīti yathā aññe sattā yonimagge laggantā bhaggavibhaggā nikkhamanti, na evaṃ nikkhamati, alaggo hutvā nikkhamatīti attho. Udenāti udakena. Kenaci asucināti yathā aññe sattā kammajavātehi uddhaṃpādā adhosirā yonimagge pakkhittā sataporisanarakapapātaṃ patantā viya tāḷacchiddena nikkaḍḍhiyamānā hatthī viya mahādukkhaṃ anubhavantā nānāasucimakkhitāva nikkhamanti, na evaṃ bodhisatto. Bodhisattañhi kammajavātā uddhaṃpādaṃ adhosiraṃ kātuṃ na sakkonti. So dhammāsanato otaranto dhammakathiko viya nisseṇito otaranto puriso viya ca dve hatthe ca pāde ca pasāretvā ṭhitakova mātukucchisambhavena kenaci asucinā amakkhitova nikkhamati.
水的水流是指水柱。其中,冷水落在金盆里,热水落在银盆里。说这个,是为了表明:那既未与任何不净物混杂、又是他们饮用及洗漱所用、且不为他人共用的嬉戏之水。至于其他用金罐银罐取来的水,以及天鹅、水鸟等所在池塘里的水,则没有限定。巴利
Udakassa dhārāti udakavaṭṭiyo. Tāsu sītā suvaṇṇakaṭāhe patati, uṇhā rajatakaṭāhe. Idañca pathavītale kenaci asucinā asammissaṃ tesaṃ pānīyaparibhojanīyaudakañceva aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ kīḷanaudakañca dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Aññassa pana suvaṇṇarajataghaṭehi āhariyamānaudakassa ceva haṃsavaṭṭakādipokkharaṇigatassa ca udakassa paricchedo natthi.
207 “正生者”是指刚出生那一刻。不过,经文里只是把它显示得像刚从母胎出来一样,不能真按那样理解。因为刚出胎时,最初是梵天神们用金网接住;从他们手中,四大天王用被认为吉祥、触感舒适的羚羊皮垫接住;从他们手中,人们用细布垫接住;从人们手中脱离后,才站在大地上。巴利
207.Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto. Pāḷiyaṃ pana mātukucchito nikkhantamatto viya dassito, na pana evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nikkhantamattañhi taṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno maṅgalasammatāya sukhasamphassāya ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena, manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhito.
当白色的伞盖被举着时,说的是天界的白色伞盖正被举着。在这里,伞盖的附属物品,比如剑等五种王者的威仪器具,也都一并提到了。不过在经文里,就像国王出行时只说到伞盖一样,这里也只说到伞盖。在那些东西当中,只看得见伞盖,看不见拿伞盖的人。同样,也只看得见剑、棕榈叶扇、孔雀尾扇、牦牛尾拂尘和头巾,看不见拿这些东西的人。据说,那一切其实都是肉眼看不见的天神在拿着。经里也这样说过:巴利
Setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāneti dibbasetacchatte anudhāriyamāne. Ettha ca chattassa parivārāni khaggādīni pañca rājakakudhabhaṇḍānipi āgatāneva. Pāḷiyaṃ pana rājagamane rājā viya chattameva vuttaṃ. Tesu chattameva paññāyati, na chattaggāhakā. Tathā khagga-tālavaṇṭa-morahatthaka-vāḷabījani-uṇhīsamattāyeva paññāyanti, na tesaṃ gāhakā. Sabbāni kira tāni adissamānarūpā devatā gaṇhiṃsu. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 千枝千环此伞盖,
诸天神擎举于虚空。
金柄拂尘纷纷飘落,
看不见那些拿拂尘和伞盖的人了。”巴利
‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693);
“一切方”这句,是说他像站在七步跨行之上那样遍观一切方位,但不应这样理解。因为大士从众人手中挣脱后,向东看去,无数千世界顿时变成一片平地。那里的天与人以香、花等供养,说道:“大人,在这里连与您相似的人都没有,何况更超胜的呢?”就这样遍观了四方、四维、下方、上方这十方,见不到与自己相似者,于是以七步跨行而前往,说“这是北方”。应当这样理解这里的含义。“Āsabha”指最上。“Agga”指在功德上最为第一。其余两个词是它的同义词。“这是最后生,如今不再有后有”这两句,是授记他在这个有身中将要证得的阿拉汉果。巴利
Sabbā ca disāti idaṃ sattapadavītihārūpari ṭhitassa viya sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ vuttaṃ, na kho panevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi, anekacakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāni ahesuṃ. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā – ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā, catasso anudisā, heṭṭhā, uparīti dasapi disā anuviloketvā attanā sadisaṃ adisvā ayaṃ uttarā disāti sattapadavītihārena agamāsīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Aggoti guṇehi sabbapaṭhamo. Itarāni dve padāni etasseva vevacanāni. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti padadvayena imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi.
在这里,以平整的双足站在大地上,是获得四神足的前兆;面朝北方,是将来超越并征服大众而行的前兆;行走七步,是获得七觉支宝的前兆;天界白伞遮在头顶,是获得解脱之伞的前兆;拥有五种王者威仪,是依五种解脱而得解脱的前兆;遍观各方,是获得无碍智的前兆;说出大丈夫之语,是转动不退转法轮的前兆。应当知道,“这是最后一生”的狮子吼,是于无余涅槃界般涅槃的前兆。这些项目在经文中已经出现,而“众多项目”那一项也出现了,应当引出来加以说明。巴利
Ettha ca samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhānaṃ catuiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, uttarābhimukhabhāvo mahājanaṃ ajjhottharitvā abhibhavitvā gamanassa pubbanimittaṃ , sattapadagamanaṃ sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, dibbasetacchattadhāraṇaṃ vimutticchattapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, pañcarājakakudhabhaṇḍāni pañcahi vimuttīhi vimuccanassa pubbanimittaṃ, disānuvilokanaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, āsabhīvācābhāsanaṃ appaṭivattiyadhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ. ‘‘Ayamantimā jātī’’ti sīhanādo anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbānassa pubbanimittanti veditabbaṃ. Ime vārā pāḷiyaṃ āgatā, sambahulavāro pana āgato, āharitvā dīpetabbo.
大士出生的那一天,一万个世界都震动了。一万个世界里的天神聚集在同一个轮围世界里。天神们先来接取,人们随后才来。弦乐器、皮鼓没有人弹奏敲打,自己就响了起来;人们身上的枷锁、脚镣等东西碎成一段一段。一切疾病都消失了,就像铜上的锈垢被酸汁洗掉一样。天生眼盲的人看见了色相,天生耳聋的人听到了声音,跛脚的人变得健步如飞,天生迟钝呆傻乃至聋哑的人也恢复了忆念,驶往异国的船只顺利抵达了良港,空中和地上的宝物各自放出光芒,仇敌之间生起了慈心,无间地狱的火熄灭了。世界之间出现了光明,河流里的水不再流动,大海的水变得像甘甜的一样,风不再吹,停在空中、山上和树上的鸟都飞落到了地面,月亮格外明亮,太阳既不热也不冷,清净无染,时节调顺,天神们站在各自天宫的门口,拍手、欢笑、抛掷衣服等,尽情地嬉戏欢庆,覆盖四大洲的大云降下了雨,大众没有受到饥饿和干渴的逼迫,门户自己打开了,应时开花结果的树都结了花和果,一万个世界变成了一片连绵的幢幡与花鬘。巴利
Mahāpurisassa hi jātadivase dasasahassilokadhātu kampi. Dasasahassilokadhātumhi devatā ekacakkavāḷe sannipatiṃsu. Paṭhamaṃ devā paṭiggahiṃsu, pacchā manussā. Tantibaddhā vīṇā cammabaddhā bheriyo ca kenaci avāditā sayameva vajjiṃsu, manussānaṃ andubandhanādīni khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ bhijjiṃsu. Sabbarogā ambilena dhotatambamalaṃ viya vigacchiṃsu, jaccandhā rūpāni passiṃsu. Jaccabadhirā saddaṃ suṇiṃsu, pīṭhasappī javanasampannā ahesuṃ, jātijaḷānampi eḷamūgānaṃ sati patiṭṭhāsi, videse pakkhandanāvā supaṭṭanaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, ākāsaṭṭhakabhūmaṭṭhakaratanāni sakatejobhāsitāni ahesuṃ, verino mettacittaṃ paṭilabhiṃsu, avīcimhi aggi nibbāyi. Lokantare āloko udapādi, nadīsu jalaṃ na pavatti, mahāsamuddesu madhurasadisaṃ udakaṃ ahosi, vāto na vāyi, ākāsapabbatarukkhagatā sakuṇā bhassitvā pathavīgatā ahesuṃ, cando atiroci, sūriyo na uṇho na sītalo nimmalo utusampanno ahosi, devatā attano attano vimānadvāre ṭhatvā apphoṭanaseḷanacelukkhepādīhi mahākīḷaṃ kīḷiṃsu, cātuddīpikamahāmegho vassi, mahājanaṃ neva khudā na pipāsā pīḷesi, dvārakavāṭāni sayameva vivariṃsu, pupphūpagaphalūpagā rukkhā pupphaphalāni gaṇhiṃsu, dasasahassilokadhātu ekaddhajamālā ahosīti.
在这其中,十千世界的震动,是他获得一切知智的前兆;诸天神在一个轮围世界里聚集,是转法轮时诸天神一时齐集、领受法的前兆;诸天神先领受,是获得四种色界禅那的前兆;人们后来领受,是获得四种无色界禅那的前兆;弦乐器自己发出声音,是获得次第住的前兆;皮鼓自己发出声音,是大声宣说大法鼓的前兆;枷锁等物断裂,是断除我慢的前兆;一切疾病消失,是一切烦恼消失的前兆;天生眼盲的人看见色相,是获得天眼的前兆;天生耳聋的人听见声音,是获得天耳界的前兆;跛脚的人获得快速行走的能力,是证得四神足的前兆;愚钝的人建立起忆念,是获得四念处的前兆;驶向异域的船只顺利抵达良港,是证得四无碍解的前兆;宝物自己放出炽盛的光明,是将来为世间示现法光的前兆。巴利
Tatrāpissa dasasahassilokadhātukampo sabbaññutañāṇapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, devatānaṃ ekacakkavāḷe sannipāto dhammacakkappavattanakāle ekappahārena sannipatitvā dhammapaṭiggaṇhanassa pubbanimittaṃ, paṭhamaṃ devatānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ paṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ. Pacchā manussānaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ catunnaṃ arūpajjhānānaṃ paṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, tantibaddhavīṇānaṃ sayaṃ vajjanaṃ anupubbavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, cammabaddhabherīnaṃ vajjanaṃ mahatiyā dhammabheriyā anussāvanassa pubbanimittaṃ, andubandhanādīnaṃ chedo asmimānasamucchedassa pubbanimittaṃ, sabbarogavigamo sabbakilesavigamassa pubbanimittaṃ, jaccandhānaṃ rūpadassanaṃ dibbacakkhupaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, jaccabadhirānaṃ saddassavanaṃ dibbasotadhātupaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ , pīṭhasappīnaṃ javanasampadā catuiddhipādādhigamassa pubbanimittaṃ, jaḷānaṃ satipatiṭṭhānaṃ catusatipaṭṭhānapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, videsapakkhandanāvānaṃ supaṭṭanasampāpuṇanaṃ catupaṭisambhidādhigamassa pubbanimittaṃ, ratanānaṃ sakatejobhāsitattaṃ yaṃ lokassa dhammobhāsaṃ dassessati tassa pubbanimittaṃ.
仇敌生起慈心,是获得四梵住的前兆;无间地狱的火熄灭,是十一种火熄灭的前兆;世界之间的光明,是驱散无明黑暗、得见智慧之光的前兆;大海的甘甜,是以涅槃之味成为一味的前兆;风不再吹动,是摧破六十二种邪见的前兆;飞鸟落在地上,是大众听了教导之后、在有生之年皈依的前兆;月亮格外明亮,是受到众人喜爱的前兆;太阳避开炎热与寒冷、时节舒适,是身心快乐生起的前兆;天众在宫殿门口拍手嬉戏等,是成佛之后发出优陀那感叹的前兆;四大洲降下大雨,是降下广大法雨的前兆;不受饥饿逼迫,是获得身至念甘露的前兆;不受干渴逼迫,是依靠解脱之乐而安乐的前兆;门户自行打开,是八支圣道之门打开的前兆;树木开花结果,是解脱之花绽放、沙门果之重担充满的前兆;十千世界同一幢幡花鬘,是被圣者幢幡花鬘庄严的前兆。应当这样理解。这就是众多问分。巴利
Verīnaṃ mettacittapaṭilābho catubrahmavihārapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, avīcimhi agginibbānaṃ ekādasaagginibbānassa pubbanimittaṃ, lokantarāloko avijjandhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ñāṇālokadassanassa pubbanimittaṃ, mahāsamuddassa madhuratā nibbānarasena ekarasabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ, vātassa avāyanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatabhindanassa pubbanimittaṃ, sakuṇānaṃ pathavīgamanaṃ mahājanassa ovādaṃ sutvā pāṇehi saraṇagamanassa pubbanimittaṃ, candassa ativirocanaṃ bahujanakantatāya pubbanimittaṃ, sūriyassa uṇhasītavivajjanautusukhatā kāyikacetasikasukhuppattiyā pubbanimittaṃ, devatānaṃ vimānadvāresu apphoṭanādīhi kīḷanaṃ buddhabhāvaṃ patvā udānaṃ udānassa pubbanimittaṃ, cātuddīpikamahāmeghavassanaṃ mahato dhammameghavassanassa pubbanimittaṃ, khudāpīḷanassa abhāvo kāyagatāsatiamatapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ, pipāsāpīḷanassa abhāvo vimuttisukhena sukhitabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ, dvārakavāṭānaṃ sayameva vivaraṇaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikamaggadvāravivaraṇassa pubbanimittaṃ, rukkhānaṃ pupphaphalagahaṇaṃ vimuttipupphehi pupphitassa ca sāmaññaphalabhārabharitabhāvassa ca pubbanimittaṃ, dasasahassilokadhātuyā ekaddhajamālatā ariyaddhajamālāmālitāya pubbanimittanti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ sambahulavāro nāma.
在这里,有人提出这样的问题:当那位大丈夫站在大地上,面朝北方走去,说出如牛王般无畏的话时,他到底是走在地上,还是走在空中?是让人看得见地走,还是看不见地走?是像裸形外道那样走,还是穿戴整齐、装饰严整?是以少年的模样走,还是以老迈的模样走?后来他还是那样,还是又变回了小孩子?不过这个问题,之前在铜殿僧众集会时,帝毕塔咖秋喇阿跋亚长老已经回答过了。据说长老当时先按宿命论、宿作因论、自在天变化论等种种说法讲了很多,最后才这样解答:那位大丈夫其实是走在地上,但在众人看来却像走在空中;其实是让人看得见地走,但在众人看来却像看不见地走;其实是像裸形外道那样走,但在众人看来却像穿戴整齐、装饰严整;其实是以少年的模样走,但在众人看来却像一个十六岁的青年。至于后来,他只是一个幼童,不再是先前那个样子了。长老这样说的时候,在场大众都很欢喜,说:贤者们,这位长老解答问题,简直就像佛陀亲自回答一样。世界中间那一部分,说法和前面一样。巴利
Ettha pañhe pucchanti – ‘‘yadā mahāpuriso pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho gantvā āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tadā kiṃ pathaviyā gato , udāhu ākāsena? Dissamāno gato, udāhu adissamāno? Acelako gato, udāhu alaṅkatappaṭiyatto? Daharo hutvā gato, udāhu mahallako? Pacchāpi kiṃ tādisova ahosi, udāhu puna bāladārako’’ti? Ayaṃ pana pañho heṭṭhā lohapāsāde saṅghasannipāte tipiṭakacūḷābhayattherena vissajjitova. Thero kirettha niyati pubbekatakamma-issaranimmānavādavasena taṃ taṃ bahuṃ vatvā avasāne evaṃ byākāsi – ‘‘mahāpuriso pathaviyaṃ gato, mahājanassa pana ākāse gacchanto viya ahosi. Dissamāno gato, mahājanassa pana adissamāno viya ahosi. Acelako gato, mahājanassa pana alaṅkatappaṭiyattova upaṭṭhāsi. Daharova gato, mahājanassa pana soḷasavassuddesiko viya ahosi. Pacchā pana bāladārakova ahosi, na tādiso’’ti. Evaṃ vutte parisā cassa ‘‘buddhena viya hutvā bho therena pañho kathito’’ti attamanā ahosi. Lokantarikavāro vuttanayo eva.
“已了知”是指变得清楚明白。譬如,声闻弟子在洗澡、洗脸、嚼齿木、吃东西、喝水等时候,对那些已经过去、不在他们观察范围内的诸行,没法从头到尾彻底审察,只有等这些法进入他们的观察范围时才去审察,但佛陀不是这样。佛陀在七天之内,对已经确定的诸行,从一开始就一一审察,把无常、苦、无我这三相安立上去之后才放下。对佛陀来说,根本不存在没有被智慧观察过的法。所以世尊说“已了知”。剩下的内容,在各处都很明白。巴利
Viditāti pākaṭā hutvā. Yathā hi sāvakā nahānamukhadhovanakhādanapivanādikāle anokāsagate atītasaṅkhāre nippadese sammasituṃ na sakkonti, okāsapattayeva sammasanti, na evaṃ buddhā. Buddhā hi sattadivasabbhantare vavatthitasaṅkhāre ādito paṭṭhāya sammasitvā tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvāva vissajjenti, tesaṃ avipassitadhammo nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘viditā’’ti āha. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
4. 巴咕拉经的注释巴利
4. Bākulasuttavaṇṇanā
209 “如是我闻”等语,就是《巴咕拉经》。其中“巴咕拉”这个名字,就像本来该说“二十二”“三十二”,却说成“巴二十二”“巴三十二”那样,本来该说“两家”,却说成了“巴咕拉”。因为这位长老有两家亲属。据说,他从天界死后,投生到憍赏弥城的一个大富之家。在他出生后的第五天,家人给他洗了头,带他到恒河边玩耍。保姆抱着孩子在水中一沉一浮地嬉戏时,一条鱼看见这孩子,心想“这是我的食物”,便张开嘴游了过来。保姆丢下孩子就逃跑了。鱼把孩子吞了下去。这孩子有福德,所以没有受苦,就像走进自己的卧室躺下一样。那条鱼因为孩子的威德之力,仿佛吞下了一块烧得滚烫的铁片,被烧灼着飞速游了三十由旬的路程,钻进了波罗奈一个渔夫的渔网里。通常大鱼一旦被网住,遭到击打就会死去。但这条鱼因为孩子的威德之力,刚被拖出渔网就已经死了。渔夫们捕到这条大鱼,正要剖开出售,却因为孩子威德力的缘故,鱼身根本剖不开,于是他们抬着整条鱼在城里边走边喊:“我们以一千金币出售。”却没有人买。巴利
209.Evaṃme sutanti bākulasuttaṃ. Tattha bākuloti yathā dvāvīsati dvattiṃsātiādimhi vattabbe bāvīsati bāttiṃsātiādīni vuccanti, evameva dvikuloti vattabbe bākuloti vuttaṃ. Tassa hi therassa dve kulāni ahesuṃ. So kira devaloko cavitvā kosambinagare nāma mahāseṭṭhikule nibbatto, tamenaṃ pañcame divase sīsaṃ nhāpetvā gaṅgākīḷaṃ akaṃsu. Dhātiyā dārakaṃ udake nimujjanummujjanavasena kīḷāpentiyā eko maccho dārakaṃ disvā ‘‘bhakkho me aya’’nti maññamāno mukhaṃ vivaritvā upagato. Dhātī dārakaṃ chaḍḍetvā palātā. Maccho taṃ gili. Puññavā satto dukkhaṃ na pāpuṇi, sayanagabbhaṃ pavisitvā nipanno viya ahosi. Maccho dārakassa tejena tattakapallaṃ gilitvā dayhamāno viya vegena tiṃsayojanamaggaṃ gantvā bārāṇasinagaravāsino macchabandhassa jālaṃ pāvisi, mahāmacchā nāma jālabaddhā pahariyamānā maranti. Ayaṃ pana dārakassa tejena jālato nīhaṭamattova mato. Macchabandhā ca mahantaṃ macchaṃ labhitvā phāletvā vikkiṇanti. Taṃ pana dārakassa ānubhāvena aphāletvā sakalameva kājena haritvā sahassena demāti vadantā nagare vicariṃsu. Koci na gaṇhāti.
那时,在那座城里,有一户没有子嗣的富豪家,拥有八十俱胝财产。渔夫们来到他家门口,被问道:“拿什么来换?”他们回答说:“一个迦哈巴那钱。”富豪家付了一个迦哈巴那钱,就把鱼买下了。富豪的妻子平时对别的日子里的鱼从不感兴趣,但那天却亲自把鱼放在木板上剖开。人们剖鱼通常是从腹部下刀,她却从背部剖开。她在鱼腹中看到一个金色皮肤的婴儿,便大声喊道:“我在鱼腹里得到了一个儿子!”随即抱起婴儿,来到丈夫面前。富豪立刻让人敲鼓宣告全城,然后带着孩子去见国王,说道:“陛下,我在鱼腹中得到了这个孩子,该怎么办呢?”国王说:“这人真有福德,竟能在鱼腹中安然无恙地待着。你就把他养大吧。”巴利
Tasmiṃ pana nagare aputtakaṃ asītikoṭivibhavaṃ seṭṭhikulaṃ atthi, tassa dvāramūlaṃ patvā ‘‘kiṃ gahetvā dethā’’ti vuttā kahāpaṇanti āhaṃsu. Tehi kahāpaṇaṃ datvā gahito. Seṭṭhibhariyāpi aññesu divasesu macche na kelāyati, taṃ divasaṃ pana macchaṃ phalake ṭhapetvā sayameva phālesi. Macchañca nāma kucchito phālenti, sā pana piṭṭhito phālentī macchakucchiyaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ dārakaṃ disvā – ‘‘macchakucchiyaṃ me putto laddho’’ti nādaṃ naditvā dārakaṃ ādāya sāmikassa santikaṃ agamāsi. Seṭṭhi tāvadeva bheriṃ carāpetvā dārakaṃ ādāya rañño santikaṃ gantvā – ‘‘macchakucchiyaṃ me deva dārako laddho, kiṃ karomī’’ti āha. Puññavā esa, yo macchakucchiyaṃ arogo vasi, posehi nanti.
另一家听说在波罗奈,有一户富豪人家在鱼肚子里得到了一个孩子,就赶了过去。那时孩子的母亲正给孩子打扮好,逗他玩。她一见孩子就说:“这孩子真讨人喜欢。”于是走上前去,把事情经过说了出来。对方说:“这是我的儿子。”等等。她问:“你从哪里得到他的?”
答:“从鱼肚子里。”她说:“他不是你的儿子,是我的儿子。”又问:“那你从哪里得到他的?”
答:“我怀了他十个月,后来带他在河边玩时,鱼把他吞了。”她说:“你的儿子大概是被别的鱼吞了,我这一个是从鱼肚子里得到的。”于是两家都去了王宫。国王说:“这位母亲怀胎十个月,不能说不是母亲;而渔夫捕鱼时,也不会先把鱼肚子剖开再捕,孩子确实是从鱼肚子里得到的,所以另一位也不能说不是母亲。这孩子就作为两家共同的继承人,你们两家一起养育他吧。”于是两家共同养育他。巴利
Assosi kho itaraṃ kulaṃ – ‘‘bārāṇasiyaṃ kira ekaṃ seṭṭhikulaṃ macchakucchiyaṃ dārakaṃ labhatī’’ti, te tattha agamaṃsu. Athassa mātā dārakaṃ alaṅkaritvā kīḷāpiyamānaṃ disvāva ‘‘manāpo vatāyaṃ dārako’’ti gantvā pavatiṃ ācikkhi. Itarā mayhaṃ puttotiādimāha. Kahaṃ te laddhoti? Macchakucchiyanti. No tuyhaṃ putto, mayhaṃ puttoti. Kahaṃ te laddhoti? Mayā dasamāse kucchiyā dhārito, atha naṃ nadiyā kīḷāpiyamānaṃ maccho gilīti. Tuyhaṃ putto aññena macchena gilito bhavissati, ayaṃ pana mayā macchakucchiyaṃ laddhoti, ubhopi rājakulaṃ agamaṃsu. Rājā āha – ‘‘ayaṃ dasa māse kucchiyā dhāritattā amātā kātuṃ na sakkā, macchaṃ gaṇhantāpi vakkayakanādīni bahi katvā gaṇhantā nāma natthīti macchakucchiyaṃ laddhattā ayampi amātā kātuṃ na sakkā, dārako ubhinnampi kulānaṃ dāyādo hotu, ubhopi naṃ jaggathā’’ti ubhopi jaggiṃsu.
他成年后,两座城都为他建了宫殿,还安排了各种歌舞表演。他在每座城里各住四个月。住满四个月后,人们在一艘叫“桑伽他那”的船上搭起帐亭,让他和那些歌舞艺人一起上船。他一边享受着这些福报,一边前往另一座城。那座城的居民派歌舞艺人到半路迎接,他们上前迎接,簇拥着他回到自己城里的宫殿。原来那座城的歌舞艺人则转身返回自己的城市。他在那里住满四个月后,又按同样的方式前往另一座城。就这样享受福报,整整过了八十年。巴利
Viññutaṃ pattassa dvīsupi nagaresu pāsādaṃ kāretvā nāṭakāni paccupaṭṭhāpesuṃ. Ekekasmiṃ nagare cattāro cattāro māse vasati, ekasmiṃ nagare cattāro māse vuṭṭhassa saṅghāṭanāvāya maṇḍapaṃ kāretvā tattha naṃ saddhiṃ nāṭakāhi āropenti. So sampattiṃ anubhavamāno itaraṃ nagaraṃ gacchati. Taṃnagaravāsino nāṭakāni upaḍḍhamaggaṃ agamaṃsu. Te paccuggantvā taṃ parivāretvā attano pāsādaṃ nayanti. Itarāni nāṭakāni nivattitvā attano nagarameva gacchanti. Tattha cattāro māse vasitvā teneva niyāmena puna itaraṃ nagaraṃ gacchati. Evamassa sampattiṃ anubhavantassa asīti vassāni paripuṇṇāni.
那时,世尊游行到了波罗奈。他在世尊面前听了法,生起信心,就出家了。出家之后,他仅仅做了七天的凡夫,到第八天就和无碍解一起证得了阿拉汉果。他就是这样有两家因缘的,因此被称为“巴咕拉”。巴利
Atha bhagavā cārikaṃ caramāno bārāṇasiṃ patto. So bhagavato santike dhammaṃ sutvā paṭiladdhasaddho pabbajito. Pabbajitvā sattāhameva puthujjano ahosi, aṭṭhame pana so saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti evamassa dve kulāni ahesuṃ. Tasmā bākuloti saṅkhaṃ agamāsīti.
“旧时在家时的朋友”,指的是他以前还在家时的那位同伴。这位朋友也活得很长寿,到了八十岁还去看望已经出家的长老。所谓“淫欲之事”,是说那个愚痴的裸形沙门问的是愚痴的问题,并不是佛教教法里的话。现在,他接受了长老所给的教示,又接着问:“那么这些呢?”巴利
Purāṇagihisahāyoti pubbe gihikāle sahāyo. Ayampi dīghāyukova theraṃ pabbajitaṃ passituṃ gacchanto asītime vasse gato. Methuno dhammoti bālo naggasamaṇako bālapucchaṃ pucchati, na sāsanavacanaṃ, idāni therena dinnanaye ṭhito imehi pana teti pucchi.
210 “尊者,凡是……”这些词句,在所有的问答场合中,都是结集法藏的长老们确定下来之后安立的。其中,想只是刚一产生,寻就成了区分业道的因素。不过长老说:“你们为什么要分开安立?这两者同样都是区分业道的因素。”巴利
210.Yaṃpāyasmātiādīni padāni sabbavāresu dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi niyametvā ṭhapitāni. Tattha saññā uppannamattāva, vitakko kammapathabhedakoti . Thero panāha – ‘‘kasmā visuṃ karotha, ubhayampetaṃ kammapathabhedakamevā’’ti.
211 “居士衣”是指雨安居衣。“用刀”是指用刀片。“以针”是说我不记得曾经拿针来缝制,就是这个意思。“迦絺那衣”是指迦絺那衣,因为迦絺那衣也确实属于雨安居衣这一类。所以在那一段里说“不记得曾经缝制”。巴利
211.Gahapaticīvaranti vassāvāsikaṃ cīvaraṃ. Satthenāti pipphalakena. Sūciyāti sūciṃ gahetvā sibbitabhāvaṃ na sarāmīti attho. Kathine cīvaranti kathinacīvaraṃ, kathinacīvarampi hi vassāvāsikagatikameva. Tasmā tattha ‘‘sibbitā nābhijānāmī’’ti āha.
那么,他这么长时间都不接受居士供养的袈裟,也不做裁剪、缝制等事,袈裟又从哪里来呢?来自两座城市。因为这位长老确实极有声望,他的儿女、孙辈等人用细软的布料做成袈裟,染好色后装进箱子里派人送来。长老洗澡时,他们就把袈裟放在浴室里。长老就穿上这些袈裟,把旧袈裟送给前来出家的人。长老穿上这些袈裟之后,不再做新的缝制工作,也完全没有积攒衣料之类的行为。他只是反复进入果定而坐着。当四个月过去时,那些袈裟沾上了些尘垢,他们便又用同样的方式送来给他。也有人说每半个月就换一次。巴利
Ettakaṃ panassa kālaṃ gahapaticīvaraṃ asādiyantassa chindanasibbanādīni akarontassa kuto cīvaraṃ uppajjatīti. Dvīhi nagarehi. Thero hi mahāyasassī, tassa puttadhītaro nattapanattakā sukhumasāṭakehi cīvarāni kāretvā rajāpetvā samugge pakkhipitvā pahiṇanti. Therassa nhānakāle nhānakoṭṭhake ṭhapenti. Thero tāni nivāseti ceva pārupati ca, purāṇacīvarāni sampattapabbajitānaṃ deti. Thero tāni nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca navakammaṃ na karoti, kiñci āyūhanakammaṃ natthi. Phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā appetvā nisīdati. Catūsu māsesu pattesu lomakiliṭṭhāni honti, athassa puna teneva niyāmena pahiṇitvā denti. Aḍḍhamāse aḍḍhamāse parivattatītipi vadantiyeva.
对这位福德广大、具足大神足、在十万劫中圆满巴拉密的长老来说,这并不稀奇。阿育法王的亲教师、常到施主家中受供的榕树长老,一天之内换了三次袈裟。他的三衣被放在象背上,连同五百个香盒和五百个花环盒一起,清晨就送来了,中午和傍晚也一样。据说那位国王一天换三次衣服,每次都要先问:“长老的袈裟送去了吗?”听到“送去了”,他才换衣服。长老也不把布匹捆扎存放起来,而是布施给前来参学的同梵行者。据说当时整个赡部洲的比丘僧团所用的袈裟,大多数都是榕树长老提供的。巴利
Anacchariyañcetaṃ therassa mahāpuññassa mahābhiññassa satasahassakappe pūritapāramissa, asokadhammarañño kulūpako nigrodhatthero divasassa nikkhattuṃ cīvaraṃ parivattesi. Tassa hi ticīvaraṃ hatthikkhandhe ṭhapetvā pañcahi ca gandhasamuggasatehi pañcahi ca mālāsamuggasatehi saddhiṃ pātova āhariyittha, tathā divā ceva sāyañca. Rājā kira divasassa nikkhattuṃ sāṭake parivattento ‘‘therassa cīvaraṃ nīta’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘āma nīta’’nti sutvāva parivattesi. Theropi na bhaṇḍikaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapesi, sampattasabrahmacārīnaṃ adāsi. Tadā kira jambudīpe bhikkhusaṅghassa yebhuyyena nigrodhasseva santakaṃ cīvaraṃ ahosi.
“唉,真希望有人来邀请我啊!”——为什么说心的不生起很沉重,已生起的还要断除呢?心这东西转变起来很轻快,所以不让它生起是沉重的,断除已经生起的心念同样沉重。“内室”:按照《大萨咕伦达义经》(中部2.237)的说法,从门槛开始就算内室,这里指的是尼姆巴水滴落的地方。那么,这位长老的乞食是从哪里来的呢?长老在两座城市都很有名。他每到一户人家门口,人们就接过他的钵,装满各种美味食物再还给他。他从得到食物的地方回来,但吃饭的地方总是固定的。“随形好方面”:据说长老从来不取相注视女人。“为女人说法”:用五六句话为女人说法是可以的,被问问题时即使说上一千首偈颂也是可以的,但长老连符合律制的事都不做。因为大多数亲近俗家的长老们都在做这种事。“比丘尼住处”:就是比丘尼的住处。为了探病去那里是可以的,但长老连符合律制的事都不做,各处都是这个道理。“用粉末”:指憍赏弥药粉等。“身体护理”:指按摩身体之类的事。“使服务”:就是让人提供服侍。“挤牛奶的量”:指握住母牛乳头挤出一次奶的那点时间。巴利
Aho vata maṃ koci nimanteyyāti kiṃ pana cittassa anuppādanaṃ bhāriyaṃ, uppannassa pahānanti. Cittaṃ nāma lahukaparivattaṃ, tasmā anuppādanaṃ bhāriyaṃ , uppannassa pahānampi bhāriyameva . Antaraghareti mahāsakuludāyisutte (ma. ni. 2.237) indakhīlato paṭṭhāya antaragharaṃ nāma idha nimbodakapatanaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetaṃ. Kuto panassa bhikkhā uppajjitthāti. Thero dvīsu nagaresu abhiññāto, gehadvāraṃ āgatassevassa pattaṃ gahetvā nānārasabhojanassa pūretvā denti. So laddhaṭṭhānato nivattati, bhattakiccakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ panassa nibaddhameva ahosi. Anubyañjanasoti therena kira rūpe nimittaṃ gahetvā mātugāmo na olokitapubbo. Mātugāmassa dhammanti mātugāmassa chappañcavācāhi dhammaṃ desetuṃ vaṭṭati, pañhaṃ puṭṭhena gāthāsahassampi vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Thero pana kappiyameva na akāsi. Yebhuyyena hi kulūpakatherānametaṃ kammaṃ hoti. Bhikkhunupassayanti bhikkhuniupassayaṃ. Taṃ pana gilānapucchakena gantuṃ vaṭṭati, thero pana kappiyameva na akāsi. Esa nayo sabbattha. Cuṇṇenāti kosambacuṇṇādinā. Gattaparikammeti sarīrasambāhanakamme. Vicāritāti payojayitā. Gaddūhanamattanti gāviṃ thane gahetvā ekaṃ khīrabinduṃ dūhanakālamattampi.
这位长老又是凭着什么因缘,才做到没有病痛的呢?据说,在莲华上佛住世、由十万比丘围绕游化的时候,雪山里的毒树开花了。十万比丘都得了草花病。那时,长老是一位有神通的苦行者,他在空中飞行时看见比丘僧团,就降落下来,询问病情,然后从雪山采来药送给他们。才刚闻到药的气味,病就好了。到了迦叶正等正觉佛的时代,他也在开始播种那天停下播种,为比丘僧团建造了受用的火房和厕所,还为比丘僧团安排了医药方面的服务。由于这些业行,他变得没有病痛。不过,他又是坚持常坐不卧的头陀行者,也是坚持住在林中的头陀行者,所以才会说“我不记得曾经靠过什么靠背”这样的话。巴利
Kena pana kāraṇena thero nirābādho ahosi. Padumuttare kira bhagavati satasahassabhikkhuparivāre cārikaṃ caramāne himavati visarukkhā pupphiṃsu. Bhikkhusatasahassānampi tiṇapupphakarogo uppajjati. Thero tasmiṃ samaye iddhimā tāpaso hoti, so ākāsena gacchanto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ disvā otaritvā rogaṃ pucchitvā himavantato osadhaṃ āharitvā adāsi. Upasiṅghanamatteneva rogo vūpasami. Kassapasammāsambuddhakālepi paṭhamavappadivase vappaṃ ṭhapetvā bhikkhusaṅghassa paribhogaṃ aggisālañceva vaccakuṭiñca kāretvā bhikkhusaṅghassa bhesajjavattaṃ nibandhi, iminā kammena nirābādho ahosi. Ukkaṭṭhanesajjiko panesa ukkaṭṭhāraññako ca tasmā ‘‘nābhijānāmi apassenakaṃ apassayitā’’tiādimāha.
“有烦恼”:就是带着烦恼。
“正智生起”:对还没受具足戒的人,不能把正智说给他听。
长老为什么说了呢?长老并没有说“我是阿拉汉”,而是说“正智生起”。
再说,长老本来就是大家公认的阿拉汉,所以才这样说。巴利
Saraṇoti sakileso. Aññā udapādīti anupasampannassa aññaṃ byākātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Thero kasmā byākāsi? Na thero ahaṃ arahāti āha, aññā udapādīti panāha. Apica thero arahāti pākaṭo, tasmā evamāha.
212 212. “出家”:长老并没有亲自让人出家,也没有亲自给人授具足戒,而是让其他比丘这样做了。“拿着钥匙”:就是拿起钥匙。巴利
212.Pabbajjanti thero sayaṃ neva pabbājesi, na upasampādesi aññehi pana bhikkhūhi evaṃ kārāpesi. Avāpuraṇaṃ ādāyāti kuñcikaṃ gahetvā.
“坐着般涅槃”:我活着的时候,没有成为其他比丘的负担;我般涅槃之后,我的身体也不要成为比丘僧团的障碍。于是他进入火界定而般涅槃。火焰从身体上升起,皮、肉、血像酥油一样燃烧殆尽,只剩下像素馨花蕾一样的舍利。其余部分到处都很清楚。这部经则是在第二次结集时诵出的。巴利
Nisinnakovaparinibbāyīti ahaṃ dharamānopi na aññassa bhikkhussa bhāro ahosiṃ, parinibbutassāpi me sarīraṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa palibodho mā ahosīti tejodhātuṃ samāpajjitvā parinibbāyi. Sarīrato jālā uṭṭhahi, chavimaṃsalohitaṃ sappi viya jhāyamānaṃ parikkhayaṃ gataṃ, sumanamakulasadisā dhātuyova avasesiṃsu. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva. Idaṃ pana suttaṃ dutiyasaṅgahe saṅgītanti.
5. 《调御地经》注释巴利
5. Dantabhūmisuttavaṇṇanā
213 “如是我闻”这句,就是《调御地经》的开头。其中,“阿兰若小屋”是指在那座竹林里一处僻静的地方,为了精勤修行的比丘们而建的住处。“王子”是指频婆娑罗王的亲生儿子。巴利
213.Evaṃme sutanti dantabhūmisuttaṃ. Tattha araññakuṭikāyanti tasseva veḷuvanassa ekasmiṃ vivittaṭṭhāne padhānakammikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ atthāya katasenāsane. Rājakumāroti bimbisārassa putto orasako.
“触达”就是“得到”。“心一境性”:这样修行的人,就叫做得到了等至,得到了禅那——这是我听说的,他这样说。“疲劳”是指身体的疲劳。“恼害”说的就是前面那种疲劳。“应住于自己的分际”:意思是应该只停留在自己不了解的那个范围内。巴利
Phuseyyāti labheyya. Ekaggatanti evaṃ paṭipanno samāpattiṃ nāma labhati, jhānaṃ nāma labhatīti idaṃ mayā sutanti vadati. Kilamathoti kāyakilamatho. Vihesāti sveva kilamatho vutto. Yathāsake tiṭṭheyyāsīti attano ajānanakoṭṭhāseyeva tiṭṭheyyāsīti.
214 “他解说了”:心一境性是这样得到的,等至是这样生起的——他先把修行者引到安止定和近行定,然后讲了单一遍的预备作意。“宣说”就是阐明、讲清楚。巴利
214.Desesīti cittekaggataṃ nāma evaṃ labhati, samāpattiṃ evaṃ nibbattetīti appanāupacāraṃ pāpetvā ekakasiṇaparikammaṃ kathesi. Pavedetvāti pakāsetvā.
“以出离而应知”,意思是:应当通过从欲乐中脱离出来的功德来了知。这句话的意思是:安住在从欲乐中脱离出来的功德中的人,应当了知所谓的一境性。其余的词都是它的同义词。“受用欲者”,就是正在受用两种欲的人。巴利
Nekkhammena ñātabbanti kāmato nissaṭaguṇena ñātabbaṃ. Kāmato nissaṭaguṇe ṭhitena puggalena ekaggaṃ nāma jānitabbanti adhippāyenetaṃ vuttaṃ . Sesāni tasseva vevacanāni. Kāmeparibhuñjantoti duvidhepi kāme bhuñjamāno.
215 215. “应调御的象、应调御的马、应调御的牛”:在这里,应当把缺乏心一境性的人看作像尚未调御的象等一样;把具足心一境性的人看作像已调御的象等一样。正如尚未调御的象等若不作弯曲的姿态、不甩掉轭具,就不能走出已调御的步伐,也不能到达已调御者所能到达的地方;同样,缺乏心一境性的人也不能生起由具足心一境性者所生起的功德,或到达应当到达的境地。巴利
215.Hatthidammā vā assadammā vā godammā vāti ettha adantahatthidammādayo viya cittekaggarahitā puggalā daṭṭhabbā. Dantahatthiādayo viya cittekaggasampannā. Yathā adantahatthidammādayo kūṭākāraṃ akatvā dhuraṃ achaḍḍetvā dantagamanaṃ vā gantuṃ, dantehi vā pattabbaṃ bhūmiṃ pāpuṇituṃ na sakkonti, evameva cittekaggarahitā sampannacittekaggehi nibbattitaguṇaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ pattabhūmiṃ vā pāpuṇituṃ na sakkonti.
216 所谓“以手相牵”者,即用手抓住另一只手。巴利
216.Hatthavilaṅghakenāti hatthena hatthaṃ gahetvā.
应当见到的,就是适合被看见的。被覆的,就是被遮住的。被障的,就是被挡住的。被笼罩的,就是被包覆的。巴利
Daṭṭheyyanti passitabbayuttakaṃ. Āvutoti āvarito. Nivutoti nivārito. Ophuṭoti onaddho.
217 “象林住者”:在《象迹譬喻经》等经典里,在象林中游走的男子被称为“象林住者”。这里指的是精通调象、有能力捕捉大象的人。“超越看见”就是看见。“于此贪着”:指对这件事生起的贪着。“心之意图”:指心中奔驰的意图。“为劝导人们喜爱的戒”:在这里,当大象被男人、女人、男孩、女孩抓住鼻子等处逗弄时,如果它不起异变、感到安适,那时就可以说它已经受持了人们所喜爱的戒。巴利
217.Nāgavanikanti hatthipadopame (ma. ni. 1.288 ādayo) nāgavanacarako puriso ‘‘nāgavaniko’’ti vutto, idha hatthisikkhāya kusalo hatthiṃ gahetuṃ samattho. Atipassitvāti disvā. Etthagedhāti etasmiṃ pavattagedhā. Sarasaṅkappānanti dhāvanasaṅkappānaṃ. Manussakantesu sīlesu samādapanāyāti ettha yadā nāgo itthipurisehi kumārakumārikāhi soṇḍādīsu gahetvā upakeḷayamāno vikāraṃ na karoti sukhāyati, tadānena manussakantāni sīlāni samādinnāni nāma honti.
“可爱的话”是指这样的话:“孩子,国王对你很满意,会把你安置在吉祥象的位置上,你将得到配得上国王的饮食等。”这种话就是会被象所喜爱的话。“想听”是指它想听那种可爱的话。“草、饲料和水”就是草料和水;其中“草、饲料”是指用来喂的草,也就是该吃的东西。巴利
Pemanīyāti tāta rājā te pasanno maṅgalahatthiṭṭhāneva ṭhapessati, rājārahāni bhojanādīni labhissasīti evarūpī nāgehi piyāpitabbā kathā. Sussūsatīti taṃ pemanīyakathaṃ sotukāmo hoti. Tiṇaghāsodakanti tiṇaghāsañceva udakañca, tiṇaghāsanti ghāsitabbaṃ tiṇaṃ, khāditabbanti attho.
鼓是指小鼓。已舍弃一切歪曲与过失、已去除杂染,意思是说,既已断除一切歪曲与过失,也已去除杂染。就像肢体一样被算作一类,意思是与肢体等同。巴利
Paṇavoti ḍiṇḍimo. Sabbavaṅkadosanihitaninnītakasāvoti nihitasabbavaṅkadoso ceva apanītakasāvo ca. Aṅganteva saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti aṅgasamo hoti.
219 依家之戒,是指依止于五种欲乐的戒。正理,是指八支圣道。巴利
219.Gehasitasīlānanti pañcakāmaguṇanissitasīlānaṃ. Ñāyassāti aṭṭhaṅgikamaggassa.
222 222.“未调伏而死”的意思是:国王那头年老的大象在未被调伏的状态下死去、命终,这就是国王的年老大象“未调伏而死”。在这里,其含义是:以未调伏的方式死去,就叫做“未调伏而死”。这个道理在一切地方都适用。其余部分则浅显易懂。巴利
222.Adantamaraṇaṃ mahallako rañño nāgo kālaṅkatoti rañño mahallako nāgo adantamaraṇaṃ mato kālaṃ kato hoti, adantamaraṇaṃ kālaṃkiriyaṃ nāma kariyatīti ayamettha attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
6. 《布米迦经》的注释。巴利
6. Bhūmijasuttavaṇṇanā
223 如是我闻这一段,就是《布米迦经》。其中,“浮弥”这位长老是迦亚·塞那王子的舅父。“有期望与无期望”是指有时候有期望,有时候没有期望。“用自己的钵饭”是指:以平常惯常所得的饭食,连同自己已经准备好的饭,一起供养。其余各处文义都很清楚,容易理解。巴利
223.Evaṃme sutanti bhūmijasuttaṃ. Tattha bhūmijoti ayaṃ thero jayasenarājakumārassa mātulo. Āsañca anāsañcāti kālena āsaṃ kālena anāsaṃ. Sakenathālipākenāti pakatipavattāya bhikkhāya attano niṭṭhitabhattatopi bhattena parivisi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
7. 《阿那律经》的注释巴利
7. Anuruddhasuttavaṇṇanā
230 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《阿那律经》。其中“他们这样说”,是指当时那位近事男身体不舒服,他们就去到他那里,这样说了。“无谬”就是没有差错。“同一义”是说,不论叫“无量”还是叫“广大”,说的其实就是禅那,也就是心一境性本身;他是针对这个意思才这样说的。巴利
230.Evaṃme sutanti anuruddhasuttaṃ. Tattha evamāhaṃsūti tassa upāsakassa aphāsukakālo ahosi, tadā upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṃsu. Apaṇṇakanti avirādhitaṃ. Ekatthāti appamāṇāti vā mahaggatāti vā jhānameva cittekaggatāyeva evaṃ vuccatīti imaṃ sandhāya evamāha.
231 “他遍满一棵树下的范围,将其执取为‘广大’,然后安住”这句话的意思是:用遍相覆盖一棵树下的范围那么大的地方,在那遍相上,让广大禅那遍满并执取,然后安住。不过,他对“广大”并没有“这是广大”的作意,只是因为广大禅那正在运作才这么说。这个道理适用于所有情况。“居士,以这种方式”是指以这个原因。在这里,被称为“无量”的梵住,其相不会增长,不会出现“揭开”,那些禅那不能作为神通或灭尽定的基础,但可以作为观的基础、轮回的基础和投生的基础。而被称为“广大”的遍禅那,其相会增长,会出现“揭开”,有超越,能作为神通的基础、灭尽定的基础、轮回的基础和投生的基础。因此,这些法义不同,所谓“无量”和“广大”,名称和词句也各不相同。巴利
231.Yāvatāekaṃ rukkhamūlaṃ mahaggatanti pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharatīti ekarukkhamūlapamāṇaṭṭhānaṃ kasiṇanimittena ottharitvā tasmiṃ kasiṇanimitte mahaggatajjhānaṃ pharitvā adhimuccitvā viharati. Mahaggatanti panassa ābhogo natthi, kevalaṃ mahaggatajjhānapavattivasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Iminā kho etaṃ gahapati pariyāyenāti iminā kāraṇena. Ettha hi appamāṇāti vuttānaṃ brahmavihārānaṃ nimittaṃ na vaḍḍhati, ugghāṭanaṃ na jāyati, tāni jhānāni abhiññānaṃ vā nirodhassa vā pādakāni na honti, vipassanāpādakāni pana vaṭṭapādakāni bhavokkamanāni ca honti. ‘‘Mahaggatā’’ti vuttānaṃ pana kasiṇajjhānānaṃ nimittaṃ vaḍḍhati, ugghāṭanaṃ jāyati, samatikkamā honti, abhiññāpādakāni nirodhapādakāni vaṭṭapādakāni bhavokkamanāni ca honti. Evamime dhammā nānatthā, appamāṇā mahaggatāti evaṃ nānābyañjanā ca.
232 232. 现在,把(讨论)从广大等至(的语境)中抽出来,为了说明投生(到色界天)的因由,说了“有四者”等话。“少光”:对于遍满而了知的人,这种作意是存在的;不过,对于投生在少光天的诸天神,这是就正在修习作为投生因由的禅那者而说的。这个道理在一切处都一样。少光(天)的光明,有染污的,也有清净的;无量光(天)的光明,有染污的,也有清净的。这是怎么回事呢?如果以筛子大小或碗大小的(范围)来作遍的准备工作,生起等至之后,没有通过五种方式修成自在,因为对立之法没有得到很好的清净,所以只是受用了微弱的等至,安住在不熟练的禅那中,命终之后投生在少光天,而他的色(光明)既微小又染污。如果通过五种方式修成自在,因为对立之法得到了很好的清净,所以受用了极为清净的等至,安住在熟练的禅那中,命终之后投生在少光天,而他的色(光明)虽然微小,却是清净的。这样,少光(天)的光明有染污的,也有清净的。如果对遍作广大的准备工作,生起等至,并通过五种方式修成自在,那么一切都应当像前面所说的那样理解。这样,无量光(天)的光明有染污的,也有清净的。巴利
232. Idāni mahaggatasamāpattito nīharitvā bhavūpapattikāraṇaṃ dassento catasso kho imātiādimāha. Parittābhāti pharitvā jānantassa ayamābhogo atthi, parittābhesu pana devesu nibbattikāraṇaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvento evaṃ vutto. Esa nayo sabbattha. Parittābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhā, appamāṇābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhā. Kathaṃ? Suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā pañcahākārehi āciṇṇavasibhāvo paccanīkadhammānaṃ suṭṭhu aparisodhitattā dubbalameva samāpattiṃ vaḷañjitvā appaguṇajjhāne ṭhito kālaṃ katvā parittābhesu nibbattati, vaṇṇo panassa paritto ceva hoti saṃkiliṭṭho ca. Pañcahi panākārehi āciṇṇavasibhāvo paccanīkadhammānaṃ suṭṭhu parisodhitattā suvisuddhaṃ samāpattiṃ vaḷañjitvā paguṇajjhāne ṭhito kālaṃ katvā parittābhesu nibbattati, vaṇṇo panassa paritto ceva hoti parisuddho ca. Evaṃ parittābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhā. Kasiṇe pana vipulaparikammaṃ katvā samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā pañcahākārehi āciṇṇavasibhāvoti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ appamāṇābhā siyā saṃkiliṭṭhābhā honti siyā parisuddhābhāti.
颜色的不同,是指身体颜色的差异。而并非光的不同,是指在光明中看不出差异。火焰的不同,是指火焰按长短、粗细而有的差异。巴利
Vaṇṇanānattanti sarīravaṇṇassa nānattaṃ. No ca ābhānānattanti āloke nānattaṃ na paññāyati. Accinānattanti dīgharassaaṇuthūlavasena acciyā nānattaṃ.
无论在哪里:在园林、天宫、如意树、河岸、池塘边等任何地方。定居:就是住下。喜悦:就是欢喜,不厌倦。用担子:指用任何担子,装粥、饭、油、糖浆、鱼、肉等。也有读作“Kācena”的,意思一样。用篮子:指用筐。就在那些地方:从酥油、蜂蜜、糖浆等容易得到的地方,被带到盐、臭鱼等很多的地方时,心里不会生起这样的念头:“我们以前住的地方舒服,我们在那里过得快乐,这里的盐会妨碍我们,臭鱼的气味也会让我们头痛。”于是就在那些地方欢喜地住着。巴利
Yattha yatthāti uyyānavimānakapparukkhanadītīrapokkharaṇītīresu yattha yattha. Abhinivisantīti vasanti. Abhiramantīti ramanti na ukkaṇṭhanti. Kājenāti yāgubhattatelaphāṇitamacchamaṃsakājesu yena kenaci kājena. ‘‘Kācenāti’’pi pāṭho, ayameva attho. Piṭakenāti pacchiyā. Tattha tatthevāti sappimadhuphāṇitādīnaṃ sulabhaṭṭhānato loṇapūtimacchādīnaṃ ussannaṭṭhānaṃ nītā ‘‘pubbe amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ phāsukaṃ, tattha sukhaṃ vasimhā, idha loṇaṃ vā no bādhati pūtimacchagandho vā sīsarogaṃ uppādetī’’ti evaṃ cittaṃ anuppādetvā tattha tattheva ramanti.
234 234. “光”指具足光辉。“以彼支分”指以投生到那里的支分,也就是投生到那里的因。现在为了问那个因,说了“尊者,那到底是什么”等话。巴利
234.Ābhāti ābhāsampannā. Tadaṅgenāti tassā bhavūpapattiyā aṅgena, bhavūpapattikāraṇenāti attho. Idāni taṃ kāraṇaṃ pucchanto ko nu kho, bhantetiādimāha.
身体的粗重,就是身体迟钝懈怠的状态。所谓“燃烧”,就是正在炽烈燃烧。巴利
Kāyaduṭṭhullanti kāyālasiyabhāvo. Jhāyatoti jalato.
235 这位长老在圆满诸巴拉密的时候,出家做了仙人,修成了禅定,然后在梵天界连续不断地获得了三百个生命体。“我确实历经长时”这句话,就是针对这件事说的。关于这一点也有经文提到——巴利
235.Dīgharattaṃ kho meti thero kira pāramiyo pūrento isipabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā samāpattiṃ nibbattetvā nirantaraṃ tīṇi attabhāvasatāni brahmaloke paṭilabhi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ āha. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
“ 我出家修仙人行以来,从不曾混杂间断,整整三百世。
我一直在寻找无为法,那是我过去世所修行的。”巴利
‘‘Avokiṇṇaṃ tīṇi sataṃ, yaṃ pabbajiṃ isipabbajjaṃ; Asaṅkhataṃ gavesanto, pubbe sañcaritaṃ mama’’nti.
其余各处都只是清楚明白而已。巴利
Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
第8章《随烦恼经》的注释巴利
8. Upakkilesasuttavaṇṇanā
236 “如是我闻”这一段,就是《随烦恼经》。其中“他这样说”的意思是:他并不是想分裂僧团,也不是想讨好谁,而是他心里这样想:“这些比丘即使听取我的话,也不会停止争吵。可佛陀向来是利益众生、心怀悲悯的,世尊一定会为他们讲出一个道理,他们听了之后就会停下来,这样他们就能安乐而住了。”所以他才说出“尊者,在这里”这番话。在“不要争吵”等话里,要知道省略了“作”字,应当理解为“不要作争吵”,意思就是这样。“某位”指的是:据说那位比丘是关心世尊的利益,他心里的想法是:“这些比丘被怒火冲昏了头,根本听不进导师的话,但愿世尊不要因为教导他们而把自己弄累了。”所以他才这样说。巴利
236.Evaṃme sutanti upakkilesasuttaṃ. Tattha etadavocāti neva bhedādhippāyena na piyakamyatāya, atha khvāssa etadahosi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mama vacanaṃ gahetvā na oramissanti, buddhā ca nāma hitānukampakā, addhā nesaṃ bhagavā ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ kathessati, taṃ sutvā ete oramissanti, tato tesaṃ phāsuvihāro bhavissatī’’ti. Tasmā etaṃ ‘‘idha, bhante’’tiādivacanamavoca. Mā bhaṇḍanantiādīsu ‘‘akatthā’’ti pāṭhasesaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mā bhaṇḍanaṃ akatthā’’ti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo. Aññataroti so kira bhikkhu bhagavato atthakāmo, ayaṃ kirassa adhippāyo – ‘‘ime bhikkhū kodhābhibhūtā satthu vacanaṃ na gaṇhanti, mā bhagavā ete ovadanto kilamī’’ti, tasmā evamāha.
为了乞食而进入:他并不是仅仅走了进去,还这样决意:“即使有人没看见我,也让他看见我。”为什么这样决意?是为了调伏那些比丘。因为世尊当时托钵乞食返回后,说了“众人喧杂,等同凡夫”等偈颂,就离开憍赏弥,去了巴拉卡洛那卡拉村。又从那里到东竹林,再从那里到巴利雷亚森林丛,由巴利雷亚象王侍奉,在那里住了三个月。城中居民也想:“导师去了精舍,我们去听法吧。”于是手拿香花来到精舍,问:“尊者,导师在哪里?”比丘们说:“你们到哪里能见到导师?导师是为了‘让这些比丘和合’才来的,但没法让他们和合,就离开走了。”居民们说:“我们就算拿出百千金,也请不回导师。导师没人请求就自己来了,却因为这些比丘,我们没能在导师面前听法。这些比丘是为了导师才出家的,连导师亲自出面让他们和合,他们都不肯和合,还会听谁的话呢?算了,不该再给他们食物了。”于是全城的人都定下了这个惩罚。第二天,那些比丘走遍全城乞食,连一勺食物都没得到,只好回到精舍。近事男们又对他们说:“只要你们不去向导师请求宽恕,这个惩罚就一直对你们有效。”那些比丘说:“我们会去向导师请求宽恕。”于是当世尊到达舍卫城时,他们就去了那里。世尊为他们开示了十八种破僧之事。这就是此处经外补充的讲述。巴利
Piṇḍāya pāvisīti na kevalaṃ pāvisi, yenapi janena na diṭṭho, so maṃ passatūtipi adhiṭṭhāsi. Kimatthaṃ adhiṭṭhāsīti? Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ damanatthaṃ. Bhagavā hi tadā piṇḍapātappaṭikkanto ‘‘puthusaddo samajano’’tiādigāthā bhāsitvā kosambito bālakaloṇakāragāmaṃ gato. Tato pācīnavaṃsadāyaṃ, tato pālileyyakavanasaṇḍaṃ gantvā pālileyyahatthināgena upaṭṭhahiyamāno temāsaṃ vasi. Nagaravāsinopi – ‘‘satthā vihāraṃ gato, gacchāma dhammassavanāyā’’ti gandhapupphahatthā vihāraṃ gantvā ‘‘kahaṃ, bhante, satthā’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Kahaṃ tumhe satthāraṃ dakkhatha, satthā ‘ime bhikkhū samagge karissāmī’ti āgato, samagge kātuṃ asakkonto nikkhamitvā gato’’ti. ‘‘Mayaṃ satampi sahassampi datvā satthāraṃ ānetuṃ na sakkoma, so no ayācito sayameva āgato, mayaṃ ime bhikkhū nissāya satthu sammukhā dhammakathaṃ sotuṃ na labhimhā. Ime satthāraṃ uddissa pabbajitā, tasmimpi sāmaggiṃ karonte samaggā na jātā, kassāññassa vacanaṃ karissanti. Alaṃ na imesaṃ bhikkhā dātabbā’’ti sakalanagare daṇḍaṃ ṭhapayiṃsu. Te punadivase sakalanagaraṃ piṇḍāya caritvā kaṭacchumattampi bhikkhaṃ alabhitvā vihāraṃ āgamaṃsu. Upāsakāpi te puna āhaṃsu – ‘‘yāva satthāraṃ na khamāpetha, tāva vo tameva daṇḍakamma’’nti. Te ‘‘satthāraṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti bhagavati sāvatthiyaṃ anuppatte tattha agamaṃsu. Satthā tesaṃ aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni desesīti ayamettha pāḷimuttakakathā.
237 现在解释“众人喧哗”等偈颂。“众人喧哗”是说有众多而巨大的声音。“等同凡夫”:就是完全相同、同一类的人。整句的意思是:所有这些制造争吵的人,因为声音从四面八方传出来,所以既喧哗又彼此相似。“那里没有哪个愚人这样想”:其中没有一个人会想“我是愚人”,所有人都自认为是智者。“也不认为别人更差”:没有一个人认为自己是愚人;更进一步说,在僧团即将分裂时,也没有任何一个人会想到这个原因,也就是不会想“是因为我,僧团才分裂”。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
237. Idāni puthusaddotiādigāthāsu puthu mahāsaddo assāti puthusaddo. Samajanoti samāno ekasadiso jano, sabbovāyaṃ bhaṇḍanakārakajano samantato saddaniccharaṇena puthusaddo ceva sadiso cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na bālo koci maññathāti tatra koci ekopi ahaṃ bāloti na maññati, sabbepi paṇḍitamāninoyeva. Nāññaṃ bhiyyo amaññarunti koci ekopi ahaṃ bāloti na ca maññi, bhiyyo ca saṅghasmiṃ bhijjamāne aññampi ekaṃ ‘‘mayhaṃ kāraṇā saṅgho bhijjatī’’ti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ na maññīti attho.
“失念者”是指忘失正念的人。“以言语为行境而说”这里是把r音缩短了;他们只以言语为行境,不以念处为行境,而且好说。怎样好说呢?他们想张多大嘴就张多大嘴,想张到多大就张到多大,张开之后就说,没有一个人因为敬重僧团而收敛嘴巴——这就是这段话的意思。“被引导至此”是指被这场争吵引导到这种不知羞耻的地步。他们不知道、也不认识“这样是有过患的”。巴利
Parimuṭṭhāti muṭṭhassatino. Vācāgocarabhāṇinoti rākārassa rassādeso kato; vācāgocarāva , na satipaṭṭhānagocarā, bhāṇino ca, kathaṃ bhāṇino? Yāvicchanti mukhāyāmaṃ, yāva mukhaṃ pasāretuṃ icchanti, tāva pasāretvā bhāṇino, ekopi saṅghagāravena mukhasaṅkocanaṃ na karotīti attho. Yena nītāti yena kalahena imaṃ nillajjabhāvaṃ nītā. Na taṃ vidū na taṃ jānanti ‘‘evaṃ sādīnavo aya’’nti.
凡是把“他骂了我”这类情形记在心里、怀恨不舍的人。古旧,就是古老、久远的意思。巴利
Ye ca taṃ upanayhantīti taṃ akkocchi mantiādikaṃ ākāraṃ ye upanayhanti. Sanantanoti porāṇo.
除了智者以外,其他那些制造争吵的人就叫作“其他人”。这些人在僧团中间争吵的时候,并不知道“我们正在被压制、正在趋近、正在毁灭,时时刻刻不停地走向死亡”。而“其中知者”,就是指其中那些智者,他们知道“我们正在走向死亡的面前”。诤论之所以平息,是因为他们像这样了知之后,生起如理作意,为了平息那些诤论和争吵而修行。巴利
Pareti paṇḍite ṭhapetvā tato aññe bhaṇḍanakārakā pare nāma. Te ettha saṅghamajjhe kalahaṃ karontā ‘‘mayaṃ yamāmase upayamāma nassāma satataṃ samitaṃ maccusantikaṃ gacchāmā’’ti na jānanti. Ye ca tattha vijānantīti ye ca tattha paṇḍitā ‘‘mayaṃ maccuno samīpaṃ gacchāmā’’ti vijānanti. Tato sammanti medhagāti evañhi te jānantā yonisomanasikāraṃ uppādetvā medhagānaṃ kalahānaṃ vūpasamāya paṭipajjanti.
“骨头被砍断”:这首偈颂出自《本生经》(jā. 1.9.16),是针对梵授王和长生王子说的。这里的含义是:就连他们那样长期怀恨的人,也还有相遇和好的时候,为什么你们就没有呢?你们这些人,父母亲的骨头没有被砍断,也没有人被杀害,更没有牛马和财产被抢走。巴利
Aṭṭhicchinnāti ayaṃ gāthā jātake (jā. 1.9.16) āgatā, brahmadattañca dīghāvukumārañca sandhāya vuttā. Ayañhettha attho – tesampi tathā pavattaverānaṃ hoti saṅgati, kasmā tumhākaṃ na hoti, yesaṃ vo neva mātāpitūnaṃ aṭṭhīni chinnāni, na pāṇā haṭā na gavāssadhanāni haṭānīti.
“若能得”等偈颂,是为了说明有智慧的朋友和愚笨的朋友各自的好坏。“战胜一切危难”是说:克服了明显的危难和隐藏的危难之后,应当满心欢喜、保持正念,和他一起行走。巴利
Sacelabhethātiādigāthā paṇḍitasahāyassa ca bālasahāyassa ca vaṇṇāvaṇṇadīpanatthaṃ vuttā. Abhibhuyya sabbāni parissayānīti pākaṭaparissaye ca paṭicchannaparissaye ca abhibhavitvā tena saddhiṃ attamano satimā careyyāti.
就像国王舍弃了自己已经征服的国土一样——比如大众王和阿林达玛都舍弃了国土,独自一人游走——也应该这样独自游走。这就是这段话的意思。“犹如林中的摩登伽象,名为龙”:摩登伽就是林中的象。“摩登伽”是象的称呼,“龙”是对“大”的称呼。正如那只奉养母亲的摩登伽象,独自在林中行走,不做恶事;又像巴利雷亚卡象那样,应当独自行走,不做恶事——这就是这里所说的意思。巴利
Rājāva raṭṭhaṃ vijitanti yathā attano vijitaraṭṭhaṃ mahājanakarājā ca arindamamahārājā ca pahāya ekakā vicariṃsu, evaṃ vicareyyāti attho. Mātaṅgaraññeva nāgoti mātaṅgo araññe nāgova. Mātaṅgoti hatthi vuccati. Nāgoti mahantādhivacanametaṃ. Yathā hi mātuposako mātaṅganāgo araññe eko cari, na ca pāpāni akāsi, yathā ca pālileyyako, evaṃ eko care, na ca pāpāni kayirāti vuttaṃ hoti.
238 “Bālakaloṇakāragāma”是居士优波离的田产村落。“他前往那里”:他为什么前往呢?据说,他看到僧团里的过患之后,生起了想见独住比丘的愿望,所以就像被寒冷等折磨的人渴望温暖等那样,前往那里。“以法语”:是指与独住的利益有关的法语。他为什么前往东竹林呢?据说,他看到那些争吵的人有过患,生起了想见和合而住的比丘们的愿望,所以就像被寒冷等折磨的人渴望温暖等那样,前往那里。“尊者阿那律”等,和前面所说的一样。巴利
238.Bālakaloṇakāragāmoti upāligahapatissa bhogagāmo. Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Gaṇe kirassa ādīnavaṃ disvā ekavihāriṃ bhikkhuṃ passitukāmatā udapādi, tasmā sītādīhi pīḷito uṇhādīni patthayamāno viya upasaṅkami. Dhammiyā kathāyāti ekībhāve ānisaṃsappaṭisaṃyuttāya. Yena pācīnavaṃsadāyo, tattha kasmā upasaṅkami? Kalahakārake kirassa diṭṭhādīnavattā samaggavāsino bhikkhū passitukāmatā udapādi, tasmā sītādīhi pīḷito uṇhādīni patthayamāno viya tattha upasaṅkami. Āyasmā ca anuruddhotiādi vuttanayameva.
241 “那么,你们有吗?”——这是针对最后一个问题问的,世尊会问出世间法。但长老们并没有出世间法,所以问那个并不合适,因此他只问准备阶段的光明。“我们了知光明”:我们了知准备阶段的光明。“以及见到诸色”:我们也了知以天眼见到诸色。“而我们却不通达那个相”:我们不知道那个原因——是什么因缘让我们的光明和见色都消失不见。巴利
241.Atthi pana voti pacchimapucchāya lokuttaradhammaṃ puccheyya. So pana therānaṃ natthi, tasmā taṃ pucchituṃ na yuttanti parikammobhāsaṃ pucchati. Obhāsañceva sañjānāmāti parikammobhāsaṃ sañjānāma. Dassanañca rūpānanti dibbacakkhunā rūpadassanañca sañjānāma. Tañca nimittaṃ nappaṭivijjhāmāti tañca kāraṇaṃ na jānāma, yena no obhāso ca rūpadassanañca antaradhāyati.
阿那律,你们应当透彻通达那个相,你们应当知道那个原因。阿那律,你们为什么不被扰乱呢?我也曾经被这十一种随烦恼扰乱过——为了说明这一点,世尊开始了这段教导。在“我确实生起了疑”等句中:菩萨使光明增长,用天眼看到种种色之后,生起了“这到底是什么”的疑。定退失了,就是预作定退失了。光明也消失了,连预作阶段的光明也消失了,用天眼也看不到色了。不作意:正在见色的他生起了疑,心想“现在我要什么都不作意了”,于是生起了不作意。巴利
Taṃ kho pana vo anuruddhā nimittaṃ paṭivijjhitabbanti taṃ vo kāraṇaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Ahampi sudanti anuruddhā tumhe kiṃ na āḷulessanti, ahampi imehi ekādasahi upakkilesehi āḷulitapubboti dassetuṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Vicikicchā kho metiādīsu mahāsattassa ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhunā nānāvidhāni rūpāni disvā ‘‘idaṃ kho ki’’nti vicikicchā udapādi. Samādhi cavīti parikammasamādhi cavi. Obhāsoti parikammobhāsopi antaradhāyi, dibbacakkhunāpi rūpaṃ na passi. Amanasikāroti rūpāni passato vicikicchā uppajjati, idāni kiñci na manasikarissāmīti amanasikāro udapādi.
昏沉睡眠:对任何事物都不作意的人,生起了昏沉睡眠。巴利
Thinamiddhanti kiñci amanasikarontassa thinamiddhaṃ udapādi.
他朝着雪山的方向把光明放大,看见了檀那婆、罗刹、巨蟒等,于是身体生起了惊颤。巴利
Chambhitattanti himavantābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dānavarakkhasaajagarādayo addasa, athassa chambhitattaṃ udapādi.
他心想:“我所看到的恐怖,平常观察时并不存在;对于没看到的,又有什么好怕的呢?”这样思惟时,心中就生起了浮动。一时:仅仅一次努力,就能看到五个宝藏瓶。巴利
Uppilanti ‘‘mayā diṭṭhabhayaṃ pakatiyā olokiyamānaṃ natthi. Adiṭṭhe kiṃ nāma bhaya’’nti cintayato uppilāvitattaṃ udapādi. Sakidevāti ekapayogeneva pañca nidhikumbhiyopi passeyya.
“粗重”是指:我那时把精进绷得太紧,结果心里生起了兴奋浮动;于是我又把精进放松下来,接着就出现了身体的不适、身体的粗重和身体的懈怠。巴利
Duṭṭhullanti mayā vīriyaṃ gāḷhaṃ paggahitaṃ, tena me uppilaṃ uppannanti vīriyaṃ sithilamakāsi, tato kāyadaratho kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ kāyālasiyaṃ udapādi.
过度精进:当我放松精进时,粗重冒了出来;于是我又一次提起精进,结果就生起了过度精进。可能坠落:意思是可能死去。巴利
Accāraddhavīriyanti mama vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karoto duṭṭhullaṃ uppannanti puna vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato accāraddhavīriyaṃ udapādi. Patameyyāti mareyya.
过度退缩的精进:当我这样策励精进时,心想“变成这样了”,于是又让精进松弛下来,过度退缩的精进就生起了。巴利
Atilīnavīriyanti mama vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato evaṃ jātanti puna vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karoto atilīnavīriyaṃ udapādi.
他把光明向天界扩展开去,看着天众时,渴爱便生起了。巴利
Abhijappāti devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā devasaṅghaṃ passato taṇhā udapādi.
种种想:当我作意于同一类的色时,生起了欲求:“我要作意种种不同的色。”于是,我时而把这些色向天界的方向扩展,时而向人界的方向扩展,在作意种种不同的色时,种种想就生起了。巴利
Nānattasaññāti mayhaṃ ekajātikaṃ rūpaṃ manasikarontassa abhijappā uppannā, nānāvidharūpaṃ manasi karissāmīti kālena devalokābhimukhaṃ kālena manussalokābhimukhaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikaroto nānattasaññā udapādi.
“过度思察”:当我作意种种不同的色时,生起了种种想,我又想:“我应该只作意同一类的色,不管是可意的还是不可意的。”这样作意时,对色的过度思察就生起了。巴利
Atinijjhāyitattanti mayhaṃ nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikarontassa nānattasaññā udapādi, iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā ekajātikameva manasi karissāmīti tathā manasikaroto atinijjhāyitattaṃ rūpānaṃ udapādi.
243 我作意光明相,意思是我只作意遍作的光明本身。而我不见色,意思是我以天眼也不见色。我作意色相,意思是我只以天眼作意所缘的色。巴利
243.Obhāsanimittaṃmanasi karomīti parikammobhāsameva manasi karomi. Na ca rūpāni passāmīti dibbacakkhunā rūpāni na passāmi. Rūpanimittaṃ manasi karomīti dibbacakkhunā visayarūpameva manasi karomi.
“光是小范围的”:在范围狭小的地方,光也是小范围的。“色是小范围的”:在范围狭小的地方,色也是小范围的。反过来,第二种说法也应这样理解。“定是小范围的”:预作光是小范围的,这里是就光的狭小而言,把预作定说为“小范围的”。“那时我的(天眼)是小范围的”:在那时,天眼也是小范围的。“无量”那一节也应依此类推。巴利
Parittañceva obhāsanti parittakaṭṭhāne obhāsaṃ. Parittāni ca rūpānīti parittakaṭṭhāne rūpāni. Vipariyāyena dutiyavāro veditabbo. Paritto samādhīti parittako parikammobhāso, obhāsaparittatañhi sandhāya idha parikammasamādhi ‘‘paritto’’ti vutto. Parittaṃ me tasmiṃ samayeti tasmiṃ samaye dibbacakkhupi parittakaṃ hoti. Appamāṇavārepi eseva nayo.
245 无寻唯伺:在五禅那的分类里,指第二禅那的定。无寻无伺:在四禅那和五禅那两种分类里,指第三禅那的定。有喜:指与二禅那、三禅那相应的定。无喜:指与二禅那相应的定。与乐俱行:指与三禅那、四禅那相应的定。与舍俱行:在四禅那的分类里,指第四禅那的定;在五禅那的分类里,指第五禅那的定。巴利
245.Avitakkampi vicāramattanti pañcakanaye dutiyajjhānasamādhiṃ. Avitakkampi avicāranti catukkanayepi pañcakanayepi jhānattayasamādhiṃ. Sappītikanti dukatikajjhānasamādhiṃ. Nippītikanti dukajjhānasamādhiṃ. Sātasahagatanti tikacatukkajjhānasamādhiṃ. Upekkhāsahagatanti catukkanaye catutthajjhānasamādhiṃ pañcakanaye pañcamajjhānasamādhiṃ.
那么,世尊是在什么时候修习这三种定的呢?是在后夜时分,坐于大菩提树下的时候。因为世尊的第一道属于初禅,第二道等则分别属于第二、第三、第四禅。如果按五禅那的分类来说,并不存在与第五禅相应的道,所以那第五禅只是世间的。这句话是就世间与出世间混合的情况而说的。其余部分在各处都清楚易懂。巴利
Kadā pana bhagavā imaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ bhāveti? Mahābodhimūle nisinno pacchimayāme. Bhagavato hi paṭhamamaggo paṭhamajjhāniko ahosi, dutiyādayo dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānikā . Pañcakanaye pañcamajjhānassa maggo natthīti so lokiyo ahosīti lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
《破除迷执》中部注疏巴利
Papañcasūdaniyā majjhimanikāyaṭṭhakathāya
9. 《愚者智者经》的注释巴利
9. Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
246 “如是我闻”这句,是《愚者智者经》的开头。其中,“愚者的特征”是指:凭借这些特征,可以辨认出、认得出“这是愚者”,所以叫愚者的特征。这些也正是识别愚者的依据,所以叫愚者的相;是愚者的行迹,所以叫愚者的行迹。“邪思惟者”是指:他思惟的时候,由于贪欲、瞋恨和邪见,所想的全都是邪思惟。“邪语者”是指:他说话的时候,说的全都是妄语之类的邪语。“邪业者”是指:他做事的时候,做的全都是杀生之类的恶业。“彼于其集会中”是指:他坐在哪里,就在那个集会中。“与彼相应、适合彼者”是指:与他的种类相同、与他相称,意思是与五种怨结的现世和来世过患相关联。“于彼处”是指:当那些话正在被谈论的时候。“愚者”等词,是属格意义用了宾格的说法。巴利
246.Evaṃme sutanti bālapaṇḍitasuttaṃ. Tattha bālalakkhaṇānīti bālo ayanti etehi lakkhiyati ñāyatīti bālalakkhaṇāni. Tāneva tassa sañjānanakāraṇānīti bālanimittāni. Bālassa apadānānīti bālāpadānāni. Duccintitacintīti cintayanto abhijjhābyāpādamicchādassanavasena duccintitameva cinteti. Dubbhāsitabhāsīti bhāsamānopi musāvādādibhedaṃ dubbhāsitameva bhāsati. Dukkaṭakammakārīti karontopi pāṇātipātādivasena dukkaṭakammameva karoti. Tatra ceti yattha nisinno, tassaṃ parisati. Tajjaṃ tassāruppanti tajjātikaṃ tadanucchavikaṃ, pañcannaṃ verānaṃ diṭṭhadhammakasamparāyikaādīnavappaṭisaṃyuttanti adhippāyo. Tatrāti tāya kathāya kacchamānāya. Bālantiādīni sāmiatthe upayogavacanaṃ.
248 “悬挂”是指它们现起。剩下两个词是同一个意思的另一种说法,因为那些法是靠着“悬挂”等方式现起的,所以才这样说。“在地上悬挂”是指在地面上铺展开来。剩下两个词也是同一个意思的另一种说法,因为铺展开来正是它的形态。在这里,比丘们,对于愚者:当那种现起的方式出现在眼前时,愚者心里就这样想。巴利
248.Olambantīti upaṭṭhahanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ, olambanādiākārena hi tāni upaṭṭhahanti, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Pathaviyā olambantīti pathavitale pattharanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pattharaṇākāroyeva hesa. Tatra, bhikkhave, bālassāti tasmiṃ upaṭṭhānākāre āpāthagate bālassa evaṃ hoti.
249 他说了这话:一位擅长衔接文义的比丘心想:“世尊并没有说‘要拿地狱来打比方,是做不到的’,而是说‘不容易’;但‘不容易’并非就做不成。来,让我请十力者来说一个譬喻吧。”他这样想后,便说出了那句“能办到,尊者”。
会击打:意思是像穿透一样地打下去,就像在同一处地方落下两记打击。这样一来,他身上就会出现两百个伤口。从这里往后,方法也都一样。巴利
249.Etadavocāti anusandhikusalo bhikkhu ‘‘nirayassa upamā kātuṃ na sakkā’’ti na bhagavā vadati, ‘‘na sukarā’’ti pana vadati, na sukaraṃ pana sakkā hoti kātuṃ, handāhaṃ dasabalaṃ upamaṃ kārāpemīti cintetvā etaṃ ‘‘sakkā, bhante’’ti vacanaṃ avoca. Haneyyunti vinivijjhitvā gamanavasena yathā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne dve pahārā nipatanti, evaṃ haneyyuṃ. Tenassa dve vaṇamukhasatāni honti. Ito uttaripi eseva nayo.
250 “只有手掌那么大”:意思是只够放在拳头里面。“连算都算不上”:意思是连计数都谈不上。“连一分都算不上”:就算说它达到百分之一、千分之一、十万分之一,这种说法也根本不成立。“连比较都算不上”:连拿来放在旁边比一比的资格都没有,看的人连看到一点点都看不到。“炽热的铁桩”:让三由旬长的身体仰面躺在烧得通红的铁地上,然后往他右手里钉入一根棕榈叶那么大的铁桩,左手等处也一样。不只是让他仰面躺,还让他趴着、右侧卧、左侧卧,然后照样做那种刑罚。“使其躺下”:让三由旬长的身体躺在烧得通红的铁地上。“用斧头”:用像一间屋子单面屋顶那么大的大斧头砍削。血变成河流淌,从铁地冒出火焰,烧到被砍削的地方。产生极大的痛苦,砍削的人却把他弄得像被线弹过的木头一样,砍成八棱、六棱。“用刀”:用像大筛子那么大的刀。用那些刀砍削时,从皮肤慢慢砍到骨头,砍过的地方又恢复原样。“套在车上”:连同轭、绳索、五辐轮和车辕、车篷等,把他套在上下通红的车上。“巨大的”:像大高殿那么大。“抬上去”:用烧得通红的铁锤敲打着抬上去。“一下子上下”:就像把米放进煮得滚开的锅里一样,上下纵横地翻滚。巴利
250.Pāṇimattanti antomuṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapanamattaṃ. Saṅkhampi na upetīti gaṇanamattampi na gacchati. Kalabhāgampīti satimaṃ kalaṃ sahassimaṃ kalaṃ satasahassimaṃ vā kalaṃ upagacchatītipi vattabbataṃ na upeti. Upanidhampīti upanikkhepanamattampi na upeti, olokentassa olokitamattampi natthi. Tattaṃayokhilanti tigāvutaṃ attabhāvaṃ sampajjalitāya lohapathaviyā uttānakaṃ nipajjāpetvā tassa dakkhiṇahatthe tālappamāṇaṃ ayasūlaṃ pavesenti, tathā vāmahatthādīsu. Yathā ca uttānakaṃ nipajjāpetvā, evaṃ urenapi dakkhiṇapassenapi vāmapassenapi nipajjāpetvā taṃ kammakāraṇaṃ karontiyeva. Saṃvesetvāti sampajjalitāya lohapathaviyā tigāvutaṃ attabhāvaṃ nipajjāpetvā. Kuṭhārīhīti mahatīhi gehassa ekapakkhachadanamattāhi kuṭhārīhi tacchanti. Lohitaṃ nadī hutvā sandati, lohapathavito jālā uṭṭhahitvā tacchitaṭṭhānaṃ gaṇhanti. Mahādukkhaṃ uppajjati, tacchantā pana suttāhataṃ karitvā dārū viya aṭṭhaṃsampi chaḷaṃsampi karonti. Vāsīhīti mahāsuppapamāṇāhi vāsīhi. Tāhi tacchantā tacato yāva aṭṭhīni saṇikaṃ tacchanti, tacchitaṃ tacchitaṃ paṭipākatikaṃ hoti. Rathe yojetvāti saddhiṃ yugayottapañcaracakkakubbarapācanehi sabbato sampajjalite rathe yojetvā. Mahantanti mahākūṭāgārappamāṇaṃ. Āropentīti sampajjalitehi ayamuggarehi pothentā āropenti. Sakimpiuddhanti supakkuthitāya ukkhaliyā pakkhittataṇḍulā viya uddhaṃ adho tiriyañca gacchati.
按部分来量:就是分成一部分一部分地划分。周围:就是被围起来。用铁:就是上面用铁板盖住。巴利
Bhāgaso mitoti bhāge ṭhapetvā ṭhapetvā vibhatto. Pariyantoti parikkhitto. Ayasāti upari ayapaṭṭena chādito.
从四面八方遍满一百由旬而安住:像这样遍满而安住,就好比站在周围一百由旬远的地方眺望时,两只眼睛像一对圆球一样凸出来。巴利
Samantā yojanasataṃ pharitvā tiṭṭhatīti evaṃ pharitvā tiṭṭhati, yathā samantā yojanasate ṭhāne ṭhatvā olokentassa akkhīni yamakagoḷakā viya nikkhamanti.
地狱之苦,不是靠讲说就能说到尽头的。意思是:所谓地狱,就是如此苦、如此苦,就算有人讲上一百年、一千年,也说不完、说不透。巴利
Na sukarā akkhānena pāpuṇitunti nirayo nāma evampi dukkho evampi dukkhoti vassasataṃ vassasahassaṃ kathentenāpi matthakaṃ pāpetvā kathetuṃ na sukarāti attho.
251 用牙齿剔出来、拔出来,说的就是这个意思。味贪食:以味贪而受用的味道。巴利
251.Dantullehakanti dantehi ullehitvā, luñcitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rasādoti rasagedhena paribhuttaraso.
252 互相吞食,就是彼此吃来吃去。巴利
252.Aññamaññakhādikāti aññamaññakhādanaṃ.
相貌丑陋,就是长得难看。难见,就像为了吓唬小孩而装扮成的夜叉那样让人不敢直视。矮瘿,就是个子矮小、脖子缩进去、肚子很大。瞎,就是一只眼瞎或两只眼都瞎。曲,就是一只手弯曲或两只手都弯曲。跛,就是像跛脚凳子那样走路。以其身愁,这句话是为了显示他的痛苦持续不断而说的。巴利
Dubbaṇṇoti durūpo. Duddasikoti dārakānaṃ bhayāpanatthaṃ katayakkho viya duddaso. Okoṭimakoti lakuṇḍako paviṭṭhagīvo mahodaro. Kāṇoti ekakkhikāṇo vā ubhayakkhikāṇo vā. Kuṇīti ekahatthakuṇī vā ubhayahatthakuṇī vā. Pakkhahatoti pīṭhasappī. Sokāyenāti idamassa dukkhānupabandhadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ.
“因失败”:就是因为赌输了。“会招致束缚”:因为他输得极多,就算把全部家产都拿出来也不够还,所以最后连自己也会被绑起来。“完整的、圆满的愚者地”:愚人把三种恶行做满之后,就投生到地狱;在那里受完剩下的业报,再得人身时,只会生在五种低贱的家庭里;之后他又再次做满三种恶行,重新堕入地狱——这就叫完整的、圆满的愚者地。巴利
Kaliggahenāti parājayena. Adhibandhaṃ nigaccheyyāti yasmā bahuṃ jito sabbasāpateyyampissa nappahoti, tasmā attanāpi bandhaṃ nigaccheyya. Kevalā paripūrā bālabhūmīti bālo tīṇi duccaritāni pūretvā niraye nibbattati, tattha pakkāvasesena manussattaṃ āgato pañcasu nīcakulesu nibbattitvā puna tīṇi duccaritāni pūretvā niraye nibbattatīti ayaṃ sakalā paripuṇṇā bālabhūmi.
253 “智者相、智者戒”等,应当完全按照前面所说的方式来理解。而这里说的“善思虑者”等,则应当结合意善行等来配合。巴利
253.Paṇḍitalakkhaṇānītiādi vuttānusāreneva veditabbaṃ. Sucintitacintītiādīni cettha manosucaritādīnaṃ vasena yojetabbāni.
轮宝的注释巴利
Cakkaratanavaṇṇanā
256 “洗了头”:指连同头部一起用香水洗过。“持伍波萨他的人”:指受持了伍波萨他支的人。“登上宫殿最上层”:指登上殊胜宫殿的上方,享用完美食后,又登上殊胜宫殿上方的大露台,进入吉祥的卧房,忆念戒行。据说那时,国王一早就布施了十万财物,做了大布施,又用十六罐香水洗了头,吃过早餐,把干净的衣披在一肩上,登上宫殿上层的吉祥床座,盘腿坐下,忆念自己由布施所成的功德。这是一切转轮王的常法。巴利
256.Sīsaṃ nhātassāti sīsena saddhiṃ gandhodakena nhātassa. Uposathikassāti samādinnauposathaṅgassa. Uparipāsādavaragatassāti pāsādavarassa upari gatassa subhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā pāsādavarassa upari mahātale sirīgabbhaṃ pavisitvā sīlāni āvajjantassa. Tadā kira rājā pātova satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā mahādānaṃ datvā punapi soḷasahi gandhodakaghaṭehi sīsaṃ nhāyitvā katapātarāso suddhaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ ekaṃsaṃ katvā uparipāsādassa sirīsayane pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinno attano dānamayapuññasamudayaṃ āvajjetvā nisīdati, ayaṃ sabbacakkavattīnaṃ dhammatā .
当他们这样作意忆念时,以先前所说的善业为缘,由时节变化而生的天界轮宝就出现了,像一堆蓝宝石,又像劈开东方大海的水面,也像在虚空中装饰起来一样。这个轮宝因为具有天界的威神之力,所以称为“天界的”;因为它有一千根辐条,所以称为“千辐的”;因为它连同轮辋和轮毂一起具足,所以称为“有辋有毂的”;因为一切方面都圆满,所以称为“一切行相圆满的”。巴利
Tesaṃ taṃ āvajjantānaṃyeva vuttappakārapuññakammapaccayaṃ utusamuṭṭhānaṃ nīlamaṇisaṅghāṭasadisaṃ pācīnasamuddajalatalaṃ chindamānaṃ viya ākāsaṃ alaṅkurumānaṃ viya dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pātubhavati. Tayidaṃ dibbānubhāvayuttattā dibbanti vuttaṃ. Sahassaṃ assa arānanti sahassāraṃ. Saha nemiyā saha nābhiyā cāti sanemikaṃ sanābhikaṃ. Sabbehi ākārehi paripūranti sabbākāraparipūraṃ.
其中,它既是轮,又因为能让人心生欢喜而成为宝,所以叫轮宝。那个因为有轮毂而被称作有毂的轮,是帝青宝石做成的。它中间有一根银制的轮毂管,像一排洁白光滑的牙齿在微笑一样闪闪发亮。中间像有一个带孔的月轮,两侧外缘则用银板围成边框。在轮毂管和外围银板相接的地方,分界线清清楚楚地显现出来。这就是它轮毂部分一切方面都圆满具足。巴利
Tattha cakkañca taṃ ratijananaṭṭhena ratanañcāti cakkaratanaṃ. Yāya pana taṃ nābhiyā ‘‘sanābhika’’nti vuttaṃ, sā indanīlamaṇimayā hoti. Majjhe panassā rajatamayā panāḷi, yāya suddhasiniddhadantapantiyā hasamānaṃ viya virocati. Majjhe chiddena viya candamaṇḍalena ubhosupi bāhirantesu rajatapaṭṭena kataparikkhepo hoti. Tesu panassā nābhipanāḷi parikkhepapaṭṭesu yuttaṭṭhāne paricchedalekhā suvibhattāva hutvā paññāyanti. Ayaṃ tāvassa nābhiyā sabbākāraparipūratā.
那些被称为“千辐”的辐条,是七宝所成,光辉明亮,就像太阳的光芒一样。它们上面的轮毂与轮圈接合处、分界线等,也都清清楚楚地显现出来。这就是它的辐条在各方面都圆满具足。巴利
Yehi pana taṃ arehi ‘‘sahassāra’’nti vuttaṃ, te sattaratanamayā sūriyarasmiyo viya pabhāsampannā honti. Tesampi ghaṭamaṇikaparicchedalekhādīni suvibhattāneva paññāyanti. Ayamassa arānaṃ sabbākāraparipūratā.
凭借该轮辋,那轮与轮辋一起被称为“有辋”,它仿佛在嘲笑初升太阳光芒聚成的华丽,通体由极其红润、纯净、光滑的珊瑚做成。在它的接合处,呈现出具有晚霞光辉的红色阎浮金板以及圆形分界线,也都清晰分明地显现出来。这就是轮辋在一切方面圆满具足。巴利
Yāya pana taṃ nemiyā saha ‘‘sanemika’’nti vuttaṃ, sā bālasūriyarasmikalāpasiriṃ avahasamānā viya surattasuddhasiniddhapavāḷamayā hoti. Sandhīsu panassā sañjhārāgasassirikarattajambonadapaṭṭā vaṭṭaparicchedalekhā ca suvibhattā paññāyanti. Ayamassa nemiyā sabbākāraparipūratā.
而在轮辋环面的背面,每十根辐条之间,有一根像吹箭筒那样内部中空、带有孔环装饰、能迎风受风的珊瑚棒。风一吹打它,发出的声音就像善巧演奏的五种乐器合奏一样,悦耳、迷人、令人欢喜。那珊瑚棒的上方有白色伞盖,两侧垂着成排的花鬘。就这样,轮辋周围被一百根带白色伞盖的珊瑚棒庄严着,又被两百排垂下的花鬘围绕。两个轮毂管槽的内侧各有一个狮口,从狮口垂下两串珍珠鬘,大小如同棕榈树干,美丽得像满月的光辉聚成一片,末端带着像初升太阳般鲜红的毛球,仿佛胜过了天河行进的美景。当它们和轮宝一起在虚空中旋转时,看上去就像三个轮子在一起转动。这就是它各方面彻底圆满的样子。巴利
Nemimaṇḍalapiṭṭhiyaṃ panassa dasannaṃ dasannaṃ arānamantare dhamanavaṃso viya antosusiro chiddamaṇḍalacitto vātagāhī pavāḷadaṇḍo hoti, yassa vātena paharitassa sukusalasamannāhatassa pañcaṅgikatūriyassa viya saddo vaggu ca rajanīyo ca kamanīyo ca hoti. Tassa kho pana pavāḷadaṇḍassa upari setacchattaṃ, ubhosu passesu samosaritakusumadāmapantiyoti evaṃ samosaritakusumadāmapantisatadvayaparivārena setacchattasatadhārinā pavāḷadaṇḍasatena samupasobhitanemiparikkhepassa dvinnampi nābhipanāḷīnaṃ anto dve sīhamukhāni honti, yehi tālakkhandhappamāṇā puṇṇacandakiraṇakalāpasassirikā taruṇaravisamānarattakambalageṇḍukapariyantā ākāsagaṅgāgatisobhaṃ abhibhavamānā viya dve muttakalāpā olambanti, yehi cakkaratanena saddhiṃ ākāse samparivattamānehi tīṇi cakkāni ekato parivattantāni viya khāyanti. Ayamassa sabbaso sabbākāraparipūratā.
这个宝轮具足一切完美的特征。人们像往常一样吃过晚饭后,各自坐在自家门口设好的座位上聊天交谈;孩子们在街道、十字路口等地方玩耍。这时,宝轮不高不低,在靠近森林树冠上方的空中,仿佛在装点着那些树枝。从十二由旬之外就能听到它甜美的声音,让众生的耳朵都被吸引过去;从一由旬之外,它散发出种种光芒交织的璀璨色彩,吸引着人们的目光,像是在宣告转轮王的福德威力,朝着王都方向飞来。巴利
Taṃ panetaṃ evaṃ sabbākāraparipūraṃ pakatiyā sāyamāsabhattaṃ bhuñjitvā attano attano gharadvāre paññattāsanesu nisīditvā pavattakathāsallāpesu manussesu vīthicatukkādīsu kīḷamāne dārakajane nātiuccena nātinīcena vanasaṇḍamatthakāsannena ākāsappadesena upasobhayamānaṃ viya rukkhasākhaggāni, dvādasayojanato paṭṭhāya suyyamānena madhurassarena sattānaṃ sotāni odhāpayamānaṃ yojanato paṭṭhāya nānappabhāsamudayasamujjalena vaṇṇena nayanāni samākaḍḍhantaṃ rañño cakkavattissa puññānubhāvaṃ ugghosayantaṃ viya rājadhāniabhimukhaṃ āgacchati.
这时,那些人一听到轮宝的声音,心里就琢磨:“这声音到底是从哪儿来的?是谁发出的?”他们朝东方望去,其中一个人对另一个人这样说:“喂,你看,太稀奇了!以前只有一轮满月独自升起,今天却带着同伴一起升起来了。这简直像一对王雁、一对满月,一前一后地升上天空。”另一个人对他说:“你在说什么呀,朋友?你什么时候见过两个满月一起升起来?这分明是那散发着炽热光芒、光焰灿烂的太阳升起来了!”又一个人笑着说:“你疯了吗?太阳刚刚才落下去,怎么会跟着这月亮一起升起来呢?这肯定是什么闪耀着无数宝石光芒的东西,是某位有大福德者的天宫吧!”那些人都不同意这些说法,另一些人则这样说:“你们瞎扯什么呀?这既不是满月,也不是太阳,更不是天宫。这些东西都没有这样的庄严成就。这一定是轮宝。”巴利
Atha tassa cakkaratanassa saddassavaneneva ‘‘kuto nu kho, kassa nu kho ayaṃ saddo’’ti āvajjitahadayānaṃ puratthimadisaṃ olokayamānānaṃ tesaṃ manussānaṃ aññataro aññataraṃ evamāha – ‘‘passa bho acchariyaṃ, ayaṃ puṇṇacando pubbe eko uggacchati, ajja pana attadutiyo uggato, etañhi rājahaṃsamithunaṃ viya puṇṇacandamithunaṃ pubbāpariyena gaganatalaṃ abhilaṅghatī’’ti. Tamañño āha – ‘‘kiṃ kathesi samma kahaṃ nāma tayā dve puṇṇacandā ekato uggacchantā diṭṭhapubbā, nanu esa tapanīyaraṃsidhāro piñcharakiraṇo divākaro uggato’’ti. Tamañño sitaṃ katvā evamāha – ‘‘kiṃ ummattosi, nanu kho idānimeva divākaro atthaṅgato, so kathaṃ imaṃ puṇṇacandaṃ anubandhamāno uggacchissati, addhā panetaṃ anekaratanappabhāsamujjalaṃ ekassa puññavato vimānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti. Te sabbepi apasādayantā aññe evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘kiṃ bahuṃ vippalapatha, nevesa puṇṇacando, na sūriyo na devavimānaṃ. Na hetesaṃ evarūpā sirisampatti atthi, cakkaratanena panetena bhavitabba’’nti.
就在大家这样议论的时候,那轮宝离开月轮,朝他们这边飞来。于是他们问:“这是为谁出现的呢?”就有传言的人说:“不是为别人,正是我们的国王——他已经圆满了转轮王的德行,这就是为他出现的。”这时,那广大的人群,以及其他所有看见的人,全都跟着轮宝走。那轮宝仿佛要让人知道它就是为了国王才来的,沿着城墙顶上绕城七圈,然后右绕国王的内宫,停在内宫北边狮子窗附近一个方便用香、花等供养的地方,像车轴固定住一样停在那里不动。巴利
Evaṃ pavattasallāpasseva tassa janassa candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya taṃ cakkaratanaṃ abhimukhaṃ hoti. Tato tehi ‘‘kassa nu kho idaṃ nibbatta’’nti vutte bhavanti vattāro – ‘‘na kassaci aññassa, nanu amhākaṃ rājā pūritacakkavattivatto, tassetaṃ nibbatta’’nti. Atha so ca mahājano, yo ca añño passati, sabbo cakkaratanameva anugacchati. Tampi cakkaratanaṃ raññoyeva atthāya attano āgatabhāvaṃ ñāpetukāmaṃ viya sattakkhattuṃ pākāramatthakeneva nagaraṃ anusaṃyāyitvā rañño antepuraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā antepurassa uttarasīhapañjaraāsanne ṭhāne yathā gandhapupphādīhi sukhena sakkā hoti pūjetuṃ, evaṃ akkhāhataṃ viya tiṭṭhati.
当轮宝这样停住时,光芒从窗户缝隙等处照进内宫,闪耀着各种清净宝物的光辉,把内宫装点得灿烂夺目。国王看见这一团光芒,就生起了想亲眼看看轮宝的渴望。他的侍从们也以亲切的话语为礼,前来禀报这件事。于是国王全身充满了强烈的喜悦和欢快,解开盘坐,从座位上起身,走到狮子窗边,看见那轮宝后,心里想道:“我确实听说过……”因此说道:“那刹帝利王看见之后……我是否就是转轮王呢?”其中,“他是否就是转轮王”的意思是:怎样才算是转轮王?当轮宝升上空中,哪怕只有一指、两指那么高,它就会转动起来。巴利
Evaṃ ṭhitassa panassa vātapānacchiddādīhi pavisitvā nānāvirāgaratanappabhāsamujjalaṃ anto pāsādaṃ alaṅkurumānaṃ pabhāsamūhaṃ disvā dassanatthāya sañjātābhilāso rājā hoti. Parijanopissa piyavacanapābhatena āgantvā tamatthaṃ nivedeti. Atha rājā balavapītipāmojjaphuṭasarīro pallaṅkaṃ mocetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā sīhapañjarasamīpaṃ gantvā taṃ cakkaratanaṃ disvā ‘‘sutaṃ kho pana meta’’ntiādikaṃ cintanaṃ cintesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘disvāna rañño khattiyassa…pe… assaṃ nu kho ahaṃ rājā cakkavattī’’ti. Tattha so hoti rājā cakkavattīti kittāvatā cakkavattī hoti? Ekaṅguladvaṅgulamattampi cakkaratane ākāsaṃ abbhuggantvā pavatte.
现在,为了说明使其(轮宝)转动起来该做的事,世尊说:“那时,比丘们……”等等。其中,“从座起身”是指从坐着的座位上站起来,走到轮宝旁边。“拿起金水壶”是指举起一只带有象鼻状壶嘴的金水壶,用左手接水。“尊贵的轮宝,请转动!尊贵的轮宝,请征服!”随后,转轮王便与四支军队一起跟随其后。事实上,所有转轮王在对轮宝洒水并说完“尊贵的轮宝,请征服!”这句话后,话音刚落,轮宝就升上空中转动起来;就在它转动的同时,那位国王便被称为转轮王了。巴利
Idāni tassa pavattāpanatthaṃ yaṃ kātabbaṃ taṃ dassento atha kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha uṭṭhāyāsanāti nisinnāsanato uṭṭhahitvā cakkaratanasamīpaṃ āgantvā. Bhiṅkāraṃ gahetvāti hatthisoṇḍasadisapanāḷiṃ suvaṇṇabhiṅkāraṃ ukkhipitvā vāmahatthena udakaṃ gahetvā. Pavattatu bhavaṃ cakkaratanaṃ, abhivijinātu bhavaṃ cakkaratananti. Anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyāti sabbacakkavattīnañhi udakena abhisiñcitvā ‘‘abhivijānātu bhavaṃ cakkaratana’’nti vacanasamanantarameva vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā cakkaratanaṃ pavattati, yassa pavattisamakālameva so rājā cakkavattī nāma hoti.
轮宝一转动起来,转轮王就紧跟着它,登上最上等的车乘,升上空中。这时,拿着伞盖、拂尘等物的侍从和内宫眷属也跟随着。接着,副王、将军等大人物,身上穿着种种衬甲、铠甲之类的装备,佩带着各种兵器,光芒闪耀,高悬的旗帜和幡幢庄严地点缀着,各自带着自己的军队,也升上空中,围绕在国王身边。国王的使者们则为了召集百姓,在城里的大街小巷敲响大鼓,宣告说:“诸位!我们国王的轮宝已经出现了,请各自随自己的财力装扮起来,前来集合!”而大众本来一听到轮宝的声音,就已经放下一切事务,拿着香、花等物聚集来了;这时他们也都升上空中,围绕在国王身边。凡是生起想和国王同行之心的人,都能如同身在空中。这样,聚集的大众方圆有十二由旬。其中没有一个人身体残缺,也没有一个人衣服污秽,因为转轮王的随从都是清净的。转轮王的集会,就像持明者的集会一样,在空中行进,又像散落在靛蓝宝石地面上的宝石一般。因此说:“接着,转轮王与四支军队一起……”巴利
Pavatte pana cakkaratane taṃ anubandhamānova rājā cakkavattī yānavaraṃ āruyha vehāsaṃ abbhuggacchati, athassa chattacāmarādihattho parijano ceva antepurajano ca. Tato nānappakārakañcukakavacādisannāhavibhūsitena vividhāharaṇappabhāsamujjalitena samussitaddhajapaṭākapaṭimaṇḍitena attano attano balakāyena saddhiṃ uparājasenāpati pabhūtayopi vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā rājānameva parivārenti. Rājayuttā pana janasaṅgahatthaṃ nagaravīthīsu bheriyo carāpenti ‘‘tātā amhākaṃ rañño cakkaratanaṃ nibbattaṃ, attano attano vibhavānurūpena maṇḍitappasādhitā sannipatathā’’ti. Mahājano pana pakatiyā cakkaratanasaddeneva sabbakiccāni pahāya gandhapupphādīni ādāya sannipatitova, sopi sabbo vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā rājānameva parivāreti. Yassa yassa hi raññā saddhiṃ gantukāmatā uppajjati, so so ākāsagatova hoti. Evaṃ dvādasayojanāyāmavitthārā parisā hoti. Tattha ekapurisopi chinnabhinnasarīro vā kiliṭṭhavattho vā natthi. Suciparivāro hi rājā cakkavattī. Cakkavattiparisā nāma vijjādharaparisā viya ākāse gacchamānā indanīlamaṇitale vippakiṇṇaratanasadisā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anvadeva rājā cakkavattī saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyā’’ti.
那轮宝在树冠上方层层行进,飞得不太高。想要花果枝叶的人,都能轻松摘到;站在地上的人也能认出:这是国王,这是副王,这是将军。无论行住坐卧等威仪,谁想以哪种方式走,就以那种方式走。那些做绘画等手艺的人,也一边干着自己的活儿一边跟着走。就像在地上一样,他们在空中也能办成一切事情。就这样,轮宝带着转轮王的随行大众,从左边绕过须弥山,在大海上方前往东毗提诃洲,那地方有八千由旬大。巴利
Tampi cakkaratanaṃ rukkhaggānaṃ uparūpari nātiuccena gaganapadesena pavattati, yathā rukkhānaṃ pupphaphalapallavehi atthikā tāni sukhena gahetuṃ sakkonti, bhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā ‘‘esa rājā, esa uparājā, esa senāpatī’’ti sallakkhetuṃ sakkonti. Ṭhānādīsupi iriyāpathesu yo yena icchati, so teneva gacchati. Cittakammādisippapasutā cettha attano attano kiccaṃ karontāyeva gacchanti. Yatheva hi bhūmiyaṃ, tathā nesaṃ sabbakiccāni ākāse ijjhanti. Evaṃ cakkavattiparisaṃ gahetvā taṃ cakkaratanaṃ vāmapassena sineruṃ pahāya samuddassa uparibhāgena aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇaṃ pubbavidehaṃ gacchati.
在这片区域中,有一块适合居住的地方:周长十二由旬,能容纳三十六由旬的集会大众;食物和用具都很容易得到,有树荫有水,地面干净平坦,令人愉悦。轮宝就停在这块地方的上空,像车轴固定住一样停在那里不动。于是大众就以轮宝停驻为信号,从空中降下来,随心所欲地洗澡、吃饭、做各种事情,就在那里安住下来。因此说:“比丘们,轮宝停驻的那片地方,转轮王就带着四支军队在那里安住。”巴利
Tattha yo vinibbedhena dvādasayojanāya parikkhepato chattiṃsayojanaparisāya sannivesakkhamo sulabhāhārūpakaraṇo chāyūdakasampanno sucisamatalo ramaṇīyo bhūmibhāgo, tassa uparibhāge taṃ cakkaratanaṃ ākāse akkhāhataṃ viya tiṭṭhati. Atha tena saññāṇena so mahājano otaritvā yathāruci nhānabhojanādīni sabbakiccāni karonto vāsaṃ kappeti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yasmiṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, padese taṃ cakkaratanaṃ patiṭṭhāti, tattha rājā cakkavattī vāsaṃ upeti saddhiṃ caturaṅginiyā senāyā’’ti.
转轮王这样住下时,那里的国王们即使听说“外敌的军队来了”,也不会集结兵力、准备作战。因为轮宝刚一出现,就没有任何一个众生敢把国王当作敌人而举起武器。这就是轮宝的威力。巴利
Evaṃ vāsaṃ upagate cakkavattimhi ye tattha rājāno, te ‘‘paracakkaṃ āgata’’nti sutvāpi na balakāyaṃ sannipātetvā yuddhasajjā honti. Cakkaratanassa uppattisamanantarameva natthi so satto nāma, yo paccatthikasaññāya rājānaṃ ārabbha āvudhaṃ ukkhipituṃ visaheyya. Ayamanubhāvo cakkaratanassa.
因为正是靠着轮宝的威力,那位国王
一切怨敌都彻底被调伏了。
人王名为克敌者,
是故彼轮称其轮。巴利
Cakkānubhāvena hi tassa rañño, Arī asesā damathaṃ upenti; Arindamaṃ nāma narādhipassa, Teneva taṃ vuccati tassa cakkaṃ.
所以,那些国王全都带着与自己王位荣耀和威势相称的贡礼,来到那位国王面前,低头躬身,用自己的王冠宝石的光辉为他洗足致敬,并说“来吧,大王”这样的话,由此成为听从他的差遣、顺从他命令的人。因此世尊说:诸比丘,在东方……教诫大王吧。巴利
Tasmā sabbepi te rājāno attano attano rajjasirivibhavānurūpaṃ pābhataṃ gahetvā taṃ rājānaṃ upagamma onatasirā attano moḷiyamaṇippabhābhisekenassa pādapūjaṃ karonto ‘‘ehi kho mahārājā’’tiādīhi vacanehi tassa kiṅkārappaṭissāvitaṃ āpajjanti. Tena vuttaṃ ye kho pana, bhikkhave, puratthimāya…pe… anusāsa mahārājāti.
在这里,“欢迎”的意思是“善来”,也就是来得正好。因为有些人来了让人发愁,走了反而让人高兴;有些人来了让人高兴,走了却让人发愁。你就是那种来了让人高兴、走了让人发愁的人,所以你的到来就叫作“善来”。然而当这样说完之后,转轮王既不会说“你们每年应该给我进贡多少财物”,也不会夺走这个人的财产送给另一个人。他只是依照与法王身份相称的智慧,仔细观察杀生等行为之后,用令人喜爱、柔和悦耳的声音说法:“孩子们,你们要知道,杀生这种事如果一再去做、反复修习、不断积累,就会导致堕入地狱……”就这样以各种方式说法,然后给出“不应杀生”等教导。因此说:转轮王这样说:不应杀生……应当如所得而食。巴利
Tattha svāgatanti suāgamanaṃ. Ekasmiñhi āgate socanti, gate nandanti. Ekasmiṃ āgate nandanti, gate socanti. Tādiso tvaṃ āgatanandano gamanasocano, tasmā tava āgamanaṃ suāgamananti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ vutte pana cakkavattī nāpi ‘‘ettakaṃ nāma me anuvassaṃ baliṃ upakappethā’’ti vadati, nāpi aññassa bhogaṃ acchinditvā aññassa deti. Attano pana dhammarājabhāvassa anurūpāya paññāya pāṇātipātādīni upaparikkhitvā pemanīyena mañjunā sarena ‘‘passatha tātā, pāṇātipāto nāmesa āsevito bhāvito bahulīkato nirayasaṃvattaniko hotī’’tiādinā nayena dhammaṃ desetvā ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādikaṃ ovādaṃ deti. Tena vuttaṃ rājā cakkavattī evamāha pāṇo na hantabbo…pe… yathābhuttañca bhuñjathāti.
那么,是不是所有人都会接受国王的这个教诫呢?其实,就连佛陀的教导,也不是所有人都接受,何况是国王的教诫,又怎么都会接受呢?所以,只有那些有智慧、有辨别力的人才会接受。不过,所有人都会成为他的随从。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,而那些……”巴利
Kiṃ pana sabbepi rañño imaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhantīti. Buddhassapi tāva sabbe na gaṇhanti, rañño kiṃ gaṇhissanti. Tasmā ye paṇḍitā vibhāvino, te gaṇhanti. Sabbe pana anuyantā bhavanti. Tasmā ‘‘ye kho pana, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha.
这时,那件轮宝先向东毗提诃的居民作了教诫,等他们吃过早饭,就凭着转轮王的力量腾空而起,进入东海。它每往海里深入一分,海水就像被药香熏过的龙王收起了蛇冠一样,浪涛的起伏也随之收敛,向下退落,退到离海面约一由旬的地方,便像一堵琉璃墙一样停在那里。就在那一刻,散落在海底的各种珍宝,仿佛都想亲眼看看这位国王的福德与光彩,从四面八方聚拢过来,把那一带海域填得满满的。国王的随从们看到海底铺满了各种珍宝,就随自己的心意,用衣兜等东西去取。随从们取够了想要的珍宝之后,那件轮宝便掉头返回。它返回的时候,随从们走在最前面,国王在中间,轮宝在最后。而海水仿佛被轮宝的庄严光彩所吸引,又好像受不了与它分离,不断拍打着轮辋的边缘,一刻不停地跟着它走。巴利
Atha taṃ cakkaratanaṃ evaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ ovāde dinne katapātarāse cakkavattībalena vehāsaṃ abbhuggantvā puratthimaṃ samuddaṃ ajjhogāhati. Yathā yathā ca taṃ ajjhogāhati, tathā tathā agadagandhaṃ ghāyitvā saṃkhittaphaṇo nāgarājā viya saṃkhittaūmivipphāraṃ hutvā ogacchamānaṃ mahāsamuddasalilaṃ yojanamattaṃ ogantvā antosamudde veḷuriyabhitti viya tiṭṭhati. Taṅkhaṇaññeva ca tassa rañño puññasiriṃ daṭṭhukāmāni viya mahāsamuddatale vippakiṇṇāni nānāratanāni tato tato āgantvā taṃ padesaṃ pūrayanti. Atha sā rājaparisā taṃ nānāratanaparipūraṃ mahāsamuddatalaṃ disvā yathāruci ucchaṅgādīhi ādiyati, yathāruci ādinnaratanāya pana parisāya taṃ cakkaratanaṃ paṭinivattati. Paṭinivattamāne ca tasmiṃ parisā aggato hoti, majjhe rājā, ante cakkaratanaṃ. Tampi jalanidhijalaṃ palobhiyamānamiva cakkaratanasiriyā, asahamānamiva ca tena viyogaṃ, nemimaṇḍalapariyantaṃ abhihanantaṃ nirantarameva upagacchati.
257 257. 这样,转轮王征服了东边以东海为界的东毗提诃后,想再征服南边以南海为界的赡部洲,就沿着轮宝所指的道路,朝南海方向前进。因此说:“那时,诸比丘,轮宝进入东海又出来之后,便转向南方行进。”不过,当它这样行进时,它行进的方式、军队的驻扎、前往敌国国王那里、对他们给予教诫、进入南海、海水的退落、取得珍宝——这一切都应当依照前面的方式来了知。巴利
257. Evaṃ rājā cakkavattī puratthimasamuddapariyantaṃ pubbavidehaṃ abhivijinitvā dakkhiṇasamuddapariyantaṃ jambudīpaṃ vijetukāmo cakkaratanadesitena maggena dakkhiṇasamuddābhimukho gacchati. Tena vuttaṃ atha kho taṃ, bhikkhave, cakkaratanaṃ puratthimasamuddaṃ ajjhogāhetvā paccuttaritvā dakkhiṇaṃ disaṃ pavattatīti. Evaṃ pavattamānassa pana tassa pavattanavidhānaṃ senāsanniveso paṭirājagamanaṃ tesaṃ anusāsanippadānaṃ dakkhiṇasamuddaṃ ajjhogāhanaṃ samuddasalilassa ogacchanaṃ ratanādānanti sabbaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
征服了那片方圆一万由旬的赡部洲之后,又从南海渡出来。为了征服方圆七千由旬的西牛货洲,就像前面说的那样前往,同样以大海为边界把它彻底征服后,又从西海渡出来。接着,为了征服方圆八千由旬的北俱卢洲,也照样前往,同样以大海为边界把它彻底征服后,又从北海渡出来。巴利
Vijinitvā pana taṃ dasasahassayojanappamāṇaṃ jambudīpaṃ dakkhiṇasamuddatopi paccuttaritvā sattayojanasahassappamāṇaṃ aparagoyānaṃ vijetuṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva gantvā tampi samuddapariyantaṃ tatheva abhivijinitvā pacchimasamuddatopi paccuttaritvā aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇaṃ uttarakuruṃ vijetuṃ tatheva gantvā tampi samuddapariyantaṃ tatheva abhivijiya uttarasamuddatopi paccuttarati.
到这个时候,转轮王已经取得了对四方大地的统治权。这位所向无敌的国王,为了展示自己王权的辉煌成就,便带着随从腾空而起,飞上虚空。他从高空俯瞰那四大洲——每一洲都有五百个小岛环绕,就像四座天然湖泊,湖中遍布盛开的红莲、青莲和白莲,绚丽庄严。然后,他沿着轮宝所指示的路线,按原来的顺序,回到了自己的王都。这时,那轮宝便停在王宫门口,仿佛在为宫门增添光彩一般。巴利
Ettāvatā raññā cakkavattinā cāturantāya pathaviyā ādhipaccaṃ adhigataṃ hoti. So evaṃ vijitavijayo attano rajjasirisampattidassanatthaṃ sapariso uddhaṃ gaganatalaṃ abhilaṅghitvā suvikasitapadumuppalapuṇḍarīkavanavicitte cattāro jātassare viya pañcasatapañcasataparittadīpaparivāre cattāro mahādīpe oloketvā cakkaratanadesiteneva maggena yathānukkamaṃ attano rājadhānimeva paccāgacchati. Atha taṃ cakkaratanaṃ antepuradvāraṃ sobhayamānaṃ viya hutvā tiṭṭhati.
轮宝这样安住之后,王宫里就不再需要火炬或油灯了。单靠轮宝的光明,就能驱散夜里的黑暗。可是,那些在夜里需要黑暗的人,他们那里照样还是黑暗。因此经中说:进入南海之后……这样的轮宝就出现了。巴利
Evaṃ patiṭṭhite pana tasmiṃ cakkaratane rājantepure ukkāhi vā dīpikāhi vā kiñci karaṇīyaṃ na hoti, cakkaratanobhāsoyeva rattiṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamati. Ye ca pana rattiṃ andhakāratthikā honti, tesaṃ andhakārameva hoti. Tena vuttaṃ dakkhiṇasamuddaṃ ajjhogāhetvā…pe… evarūpaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
象宝的注释巴利
Hatthiratanavaṇṇanā
258 258. 当轮宝这样出现之后,这位转轮王的大臣们就在平时安置吉祥象的地方,整理出一块干净的地面,让人用白檀香等芬芳的香料涂抹过,下面撒满各种颜色、芬芳的鲜花,上面在金色星辰之间悬挂着悦目的花环,装饰得像天宫一样,布置好之后就对国王说:“大王,请您想着:像这样的象宝就要来了。”国王就按照前面所说的方式广行大布施,受持戒律,然后坐下,把心投向那份福德成就。这时,被他的福德之力所推动,从六牙象族或伍波萨他象族中,有一头象王想要来享受这份特别的礼敬。它的脚、脖子和脸像初升的太阳一样红,全身洁白纯净,七处平正着地,四肢和身体各部分长得非常匀称,脚底像盛开的红莲花一样美丽,像一位有神通、能飞在空中的瑜伽修行者,又像一座用朱砂涂染了边缘的银山,就这样来到那个地方站住。如果它从六牙象族来,就是族里最小的;如果从伍波萨他象族来,就是族里最大的。不过在巴利圣典里,只说是“伍波萨他龙象王”来了。这头象王是在那些圆满转轮王德行并作忆念的转轮王那里才会来,不是为其他人来。它自己来到平时安置吉祥象的地方,把原来的吉祥象挪开,然后站在那里。因此世尊又这样说:诸比丘……龙象王。巴利
258. Evaṃ pātubhūtacakkaratanassa panassa cakkavattino amaccā pakatimaṅgalahatthiṭṭhānaṃ sucibhūmibhāgaṃ kāretvā haricandanādīhi surabhigandhehi upalimpāpetvā heṭṭhā vicittavaṇṇasurabhikusumasamākiṇṇaṃ upari suvaṇṇatārakānaṃ antarantarā samosaritamanuñña-kusumadāmappaṭimaṇḍitavitānaṃ devavimānaṃ viya abhisaṅkharitvā ‘‘evarūpassa nāma deva hatthiratanassa āgamanaṃ cintethā’’ti vadanti. So pubbe vuttanayeneva mahādānaṃ datvā sīlāni samādāya taṃ puññasampattiṃ āvajjanto nisīdati, athassa puññānubhāvacodito chaddantakulā vā uposathakulā vā taṃ sakkāravisesaṃ anubhavitukāmo taruṇaravimaṇḍalābhirattacaraṇa-gīvamukhappaṭimaṇḍitavisuddhasetasarīro sattappatiṭṭho susaṇṭhitaṅgapaccaṅgasanniveso vikasitaratta-padumacārupokkharo iddhimā yogī viya vehāsaṃ gamanasamattho manosilācuṇṇarañjitapariyanto viya rajatapabbato hatthiseṭṭho tasmiṃ padese patiṭṭhāti. So chaddantakulā āgacchanto sabbakaniṭṭho āgacchati, uposathakulā sabbajeṭṭho. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘uposatho nāgarājā’’ icceva āgacchati. Svāyaṃ pūritacakkavattivattānaṃ cakkavattīnaṃ sutte vuttanayeneva cintayantānaṃ āgacchati, na itaresaṃ. Sayameva pakatimaṅgalahatthiṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā maṅgalahatthiṃ apanetvā tattha tiṭṭhati. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… nāgarājāti.
当象宝这样出现后,象夫等人看见它,满心欢喜,赶紧跑去禀报国王。国王匆匆赶来,一见象宝就生起清净的信心,心想:“这头象乘真是殊胜,要是它能调伏顺从就好了。”于是伸出手去。那象宝就像家里养的小牛犊一样,垂下耳朵,显出温顺的样子,向国王走近。国王想要骑上去,随从们明白国王的心意,就给这头象宝配上金幢和金饰,再盖上金网,然后牵到国王面前。国王不等它蹲下身子,就踩着七宝做成的阶梯登上象背,心里生起要飞上天空的念头。就在他动念的当下,那头象王就像天鹅王一样,腾空而起,越过如同蓝宝石光芒交织而成的湛蓝天空。接着,按照前面讲轮宝游行时所说的方式,国王的全部随从也一同飞上天空。就这样,国王和随从们在早餐之前就游遍了整个大地,然后回到都城。转轮王的象宝就有这样大的神通力。因此说:“转轮王见了……这样的象宝就会出现。”巴利
Evaṃ pātubhūtaṃ pana taṃ hatthiratanaṃ disvā hatthigopakādayo haṭṭhatuṭṭhā vegena gantvā rañño ārocenti. Rājā turitaturitaṃ āgantvā taṃ disvā pasannacitto ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vata bho hatthiyānaṃ, sace damathaṃ upeyyā’’ti cintayanto hatthaṃ pasāreti. Atha so gharadhenuvacchako viya kaṇṇe olambetvā sūratabhāvaṃ dassento rājānaṃ upasaṅkamati, rājā taṃ abhiruhitukāmo hoti. Athassa parijanā adhippāyaṃ ñatvā taṃ hatthiratanaṃ sovaṇṇaddhajaṃ sovaṇṇālaṅkāraṃ hemajālapaṭicchannaṃ katvā upanenti. Rājā taṃ anisīdāpetvāva sattaratanamayāya nisseṇiyā abhiruyha ākāsaṃ gamananinnacitto hoti. Tassa saha cittuppādeneva so hatthirājā rājahaṃso viya indanīlamaṇippabhājālanīlagaganatalaṃ abhilaṅghati, tato cakkacārikāya vuttanayeneva sakalarājaparisā. Iti sapariso rājā antopātarāseyeva sakalapathaviṃ anusaṃyāyitvā rājadhāniṃ paccāgacchati, evaṃ mahiddhikaṃ cakkavattino hatthiratanaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ disvāna rañño cakkavattissa…pe… evarūpaṃ hatthiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
当象宝这样出现之后,转轮王的臣民们又为马宝准备了一处像平时吉祥马所站的那样平整干净的地方,把它装饰好,然后像前面说的那样,激发国王想要马宝到来的心意。国王也像前面说的那样,已经做过布施、供养,持守戒律,这时正坐在宫殿顶层,回忆自己的福德成就。由于他福德的威力所感,从信度马族中来了一匹名叫“雨云”的马王。它的身体像被闪电缠绕的秋季白云堆那样光彩夺目,蹄子是红色的,嘴也是红色的,身体像月光聚成一般纯净、柔滑、紧实。因为它的头像乌鸦的脖子或蓝宝石那样黑,所以叫“黑头”;因为它的鬃毛像整理好安放着的萱草一样柔软、圆润、平直、顺滑,所以叫“萱草鬃”;它能飞行于空中。这匹马王来到那里,就停立在该处。其余内容都应按照象宝部分所说的方法来理解。世尊为了说明这样的马宝,又说了“再者”等话。巴利
Evaṃ pātubhūtahatthiratanassa pana cakkavattino parisā pakatimaṅgalaassaṭṭhānaṃ sucisamatalaṃ kāretvā alaṅkaritvā ca purimanayeneva rañño tassa āgamanacintanatthaṃ ussāhaṃ janenti. So purimanayeneva katadānasakkāro samādinnasīlova pāsādatale nisinno puññasampattiṃ samanussarati, athassa puññānubhāvacodito sindhavakulato vijjullatāvinaddhasaradakālasetavalāhakarāsisassiriko rattapādo rattatuṇḍo candappabhāpuñjasadisasuddhasiniddhaghanasaṅghātasarīro kākagīvā viya indanīlamaṇi viya ca kāḷavaṇṇena sīsena samannāgatattā kāḷasīso suṭṭhu kappetvā ṭhapitehi viya muñjasadisehi saṇhavaṭṭaujugatigatehi kesehi samannāgatattā muñjakeso vehāsaṅgamo valāhako nāma assarājā āgantvā tasmiṃ ṭhāne patiṭṭhāti. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ hatthiratane vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Evarūpaṃ assaratanaṃ sandhāya bhagavā puna caparantiādimāha.
当马宝这样出现之后,那位转轮王的珠宝也出现了:从毗浮山来了一颗摩尼宝珠,长四肘,大小像车轮的毂,两端从边缘伸出极为纯净的珍珠串,并以两朵金莲花为装饰,有八万四千颗宝石围绕,仿佛映现出众星环绕的满月的光辉。这颗宝珠这样来了之后,人们把它安放在珍珠网中,用一排排竹子把它举到六十肘高的空中。到了夜里,它的光明遍照周围一由旬的地方,使那一整片区域就像曙光初现时一样明亮。于是农夫开始耕田,商人开门营业,各种工匠也各自做起自己的活计,都以为天已经亮了。因此世尊又说:再者,比丘们……摩尼宝珠出现。巴利
Evaṃ pātubhūtaassaratanassa pana rañño cakkavattissa catuhatthāyāmaṃ sakaṭanābhisamappamāṇaṃ ubhosu antesu kaṇṇikapariyantato viniggatasuparisuddhamuttākalāpehi dvīhi kañcanapadumehi alaṅkataṃ caturāsītimaṇisahassaparivāraṃ tārāgaṇaparivutassa puṇṇacandassa siriṃ paṭippharamānaṃ viya vepullapabbatato maṇiratanaṃ āgacchati. Tassevaṃ āgatassa muttājālake ṭhapetvā veḷuparamparāya saṭṭhihatthappamāṇaṃ ākāsaṃ āropitassa rattibhāge samantā yojanappamāṇaṃ okāsaṃ ābhā pharati, yāya sabbo so okāso aruṇuggamanavelā viya sañjātāloko hoti. Tato kassakā kasikammaṃ, vāṇijā āpaṇugghāṭanaṃ , te te ca sippino taṃ taṃ kammantaṃ payojenti divāti maññamānā. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… maṇiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
女宝的注释巴利
Itthiratanavaṇṇanā
当摩尼宝这样出现之后,那位转轮王的女宝也随之出现,成为他享受种种微妙欲乐的因由。这个女宝,或者是从摩陀罗王族中迎娶来的正妃,或者是凭借福德之力,自己从北俱卢洲而来。至于其余的那些成就,经典里已经用“再者,比丘们,转轮王的女宝出现,她极为美丽、令人想见……”这样的方式讲到了。巴利
Evaṃ pātubhūtamaṇiratanassa pana cakkavattissa visayasukhavisesakāraṇaṃ itthiratanaṃ pātubhavati. Maddarājakulato vā hissa aggamahesiṃ ānenti, uttarakuruto vā puññānubhāvena sayaṃ āgacchati. Avasesā panassā sampatti ‘‘puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, rañño cakkavattissa itthiratanaṃ pātubhavati abhirūpā dassanīyā’’tiādinā nayena pāḷiyaṃyeva āgatā.
在这里,所谓“极为美丽”,是说她的容貌比一般人更圆满,所以叫极为美丽。她出现在眼前时能让眼睛感到愉悦,因此即使放下其他该做的事,也值得去看,所以叫令人想见。她出现在眼前时,还能以喜悦使内心变得清净澄澈,所以叫令心净信。所谓“殊胜”,是因为她能这样带来清净信心,所以是最上等的。所谓“肤色端美”,是指肤色的美好。“具足”,就是具备。或者说:她极为美丽,因为她不太高也不太矮;令人想见,因为她不太瘦也不太胖;令心净信,因为她不太黑也不太白。她具足最上等的肤色端美,因为她超越了人间的肤色,又还没达到天神的肤色。因为人间的身光射不到远处,天神的身光又射得太远,而她的身光能照亮身体周围十二肘的范围。巴利
Tattha saṇṭhānapāripūriyā adhikaṃ rūpaṃ assāti abhirūpā. Dissamānā ca cakkhūni pīṇayati, tasmā aññaṃ kiccavikkhepaṃ hitvāpi daṭṭhabbāti dassanīyā. Dissamānā ca somanassavasena cittaṃ pasādetīti pāsādikā. Paramāyāti evaṃ pasādāvahattā uttamāya. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti vaṇṇasundaratāya. Samannāgatāti upetā. Abhirūpā vā yasmā nātidīghā nātirassā dassanīyā yasmā nātikisā nātithūlā, pāsādikā yasmā nātikāḷikā naccodātā. Paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgatā yasmā atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇaṃ appattā dibbavaṇṇaṃ. Manussānañhi vaṇṇābhā bahi na niccharati, devānaṃ atidūraṃ niccharati, tassā pana dvādasahatthappamāṇaṃ padesaṃ sarīrābhā obhāseti.
在“不太高、不太矮”等描述里,第一对说的是身高圆满,第二对说的是体态丰满圆满,第三对说的是肤色圆满。或者也可以说,这六句表明身体没有缺陷,而“超越了人间的肤色”这一句则说明身体相好圆满。巴利
Nātidīghādīsu cassā paṭhamayugaḷena ārohasampatti, dutiyayugaḷena pariṇāhasampatti, tatiyayugaḷena vaṇṇasampatti vuttā. Chahi vāpi etehi kāyavipattiyā abhāvo, atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇanti iminā kāyasampatti vuttā.
把经过百次梳理的棉絮或经过百次梳理的木棉絮放进熟酥里浸泡后,身体所感受到的触感,就是“或棉絮或木棉絮”。所谓“凉”,是指国王觉得凉的时候。所谓“热”,是指国王觉得热的时候。所谓“栴檀香”,是指一直涂着研磨精细、新鲜、由四种原料调配而成的黄栴檀,香气从身体散发出来。所谓“青莲香”,是指微笑或说话时,从口中散发出当时刚绽放的青莲花那样极为浓郁的香气。巴利
Tūlapicuno vā kappāsapicuno vāti sappimaṇḍe pakkhipitvā ṭhapitassa satavihatassa tūlapicuno vā satavihatassa kappāsapicuno vā kāyasamphasso hoti. Sīteti rañño sītakāle. Uṇheti rañño uṇhakāle. Candanagandhoti niccakālameva supisitassa abhinavassa catujjātisamāyojitassa haricandanassa gandho kāyato vāyati. Uppalagandhoti hasitakathitakālesu mukhato nikkhanto taṅkhaṇaṃ vikasitasseva nīluppalassa atisurabhigandho vāyati.
为了展示她的行为举止与她具足色、触、香等妙好的身体相称,所以说了“再者,那位……”等话。其中,“先起身相迎”:她一见到国王,就像被火烧到一样,立刻从座位上站起来。“随后坐下”:国王坐下后,她先为国王扇扇子等做服侍,然后才坐下。“听候吩咐”:她回应国王的吩咐,也就是听候差遣。“做令国王欢喜的事”:她只做国王喜欢的事。“说悦耳的话”:她只说国王爱听的话。巴利
Evaṃ rūpasamphassagandhasampattiyuttāya panassā sarīrasampattiyā anurūpaṃ ācāraṃ dassetuṃ taṃ kho panātiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha rājānaṃ disvā nisinnāsanato aggidaḍḍhā viya paṭhamameva uṭṭhātīti pubbuṭṭhāyinī. Tasmiṃ nisinne tassa rañño tālavaṇṭena bījanādikiccaṃ katvā pacchā nipatati nisīdatīti pacchānipātinī. Kiṃ karomi devāti tassa kiṃkāraṃ paṭissāvetīti kiṃkārapaṭissāvinī. Rañño manāpameva carati karotīti manāpacārinī. Yaṃ rañño piyaṃ, tadeva vadatīti piyavādinī.
现在,为了说明她的这些行为是出于本性清净,而不是出于狡诈,所以说了“再者,那位……”等话。其中,“不会逾矩而行”是指不越轨而行,也就是说,她对别的男子,连心里都不起贪求。其中,前面说的“美丽”等,以及后面说的“先起身迎接”等功德,都是她本性自带的功德;而“超胜人趣容色”等,则应当知道,是依靠转轮王的福德,从轮宝出现以后,由过去业的力量所产生。或者说,从轮宝出现以后,她的美貌等一切方面都变得圆满。因此说“这样的女宝便出现”。巴利
Idāni svāssā ācāro bhāvasuddhiyā eva, na sāṭheyyenāti dassetuṃ taṃ kho panātiādimāha. Tattha no aticaratīti na atikkamitvā carati, aññaṃ purisaṃ cittenapi na patthetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ye tassā ādimhi ‘‘abhirūpā’’tiādayo ante ‘‘pubbuṭṭhāyinī’’tiādayo guṇā vuttā, te pakatiguṇā eva ‘‘atikkantā mānusaṃ vaṇṇa’’ntiādayo pana cakkavattino puññaṃ upanissāya cakkaratanapātubhāvato paṭṭhāya purimakammānubhāvena nibbattantīti veditabbā. Abhirūpatādikāpi vā cakkaratanapātubhāvato paṭṭhāya sabbākārapāripūrā jātā. Tenāha evarūpaṃ itthiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
居士宝的注释巴利
Gahapatiratanavaṇṇanā
当这样的女宝出现之后,为了让转轮王一切该用财富去办的事都能顺心如意地运作,居士宝就出现了。这个人本来就是大富之人,出生在大富之家,是能让国王财富增长的商主、居士。而且靠着轮宝的威力,他由业果报而得到的天眼也显现出来,凭这天眼,他能看见地下方圆一由旬内的宝藏。他看到自己这样的成就后,满心欢喜,前去见国王,用财富来供养国王,把一切该用财富办的事都办妥。因此又说:再者,比丘们……这样的居士宝就出现了。巴利
Evaṃ pātubhūtaitthiratanassa pana rañño cakkavattissa dhanakaraṇīyānaṃ kiccānaṃ yathāsukhappavattanatthaṃ gahapatiratanaṃ pātubhavati. So pakatiyāva mahābhogo mahābhogakule jāto rañño dhanarāsivaḍḍhako seṭṭhi gahapati hoti, cakkaratanānubhāvasahitaṃ panassa kammavipākajaṃ dibbacakkhu pātubhavati, yena antopathaviyaṃ yojanabbhantare nidhiṃ passati. So taṃ sampattiṃ disvā tuṭṭhahadayo gantvā rājānaṃ dhanena pavāretvā sabbāni dhanakaraṇīyāni sampādeti. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave…pe… evarūpaṃ gahapatiratanaṃ pātubhavatīti.
引导者宝的注释巴利
Pariṇāyakaratanavaṇṇanā
居士宝这样出现之后,能妥善安排转轮王一切事务的辅臣宝就出现了。他就像是国王的长子。他天生聪慧、机敏、有智慧;又依靠国王的福德威力,加上自己业力的作用,生起了他心通。凭这个能力,他能知道十二由旬范围内国王眷属心中的想法,能够判断什么对国王有害、什么对国王有利。他看见自己有这样的威力,心里欢喜,就以指导一切事务来为国王效力。因此说:“再者……辅臣宝出现。”其中“该安置的就安置”,是指在各个职位上,应该把谁安排在哪里,他就安排在那里。巴利
Evaṃ pātubhūtagahapatiratanassa pana rañño cakkavattissa sabbakiccasaṃvidhānasamatthaṃ pariṇāyakaratanaṃ pātubhavati. So rañño jeṭṭhaputtova hoti . Pakatiyā eva paṇḍito byatto medhāvī, rañño puññānubhāvaṃ nissāya panassa attano kammānubhāvena paracittañāṇaṃ uppajjati. Yena dvādasayojanāya rājaparisāya cittācāraṃ ñatvā rañño ahite hite ca vavatthapetuṃ samattho hoti. Sopi taṃ attano ānubhāvaṃ disvā tuṭṭhahadayo rājānaṃ sabbakiccānusāsanena pavāreti. Tena vuttaṃ puna caparaṃ…pe… pariṇāyakaratanaṃ pātubhavatīti. Tattha ṭhapetabbaṃ ṭhapetunti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhānantare ṭhapetabbaṃ ṭhapetuṃ.
259 关于“具平等果”等句,前面已经说过了。巴利
259.Samavepākiniyātiādi heṭṭhā vuttameva.
260 “以胜取”就是胜利的取得。“大财富聚”是指在刹那间获得二或三十万(的财富)。“纯全圆满的智者之地”:智者圆满三种善行后投生天界,从天界来到人间时,投生于高贵的出身、美好的容貌、丰足的受用等成就中;在那里安住后,又圆满三种善行,再次投生天界——这就是完整圆满的智者之地。其余各处,文义都容易明白。巴利
260.Kaṭaggahenāti jayaggāhena. Mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhanti ekappahāreneva dve vā tīṇi vā satasahassāni. Kevalā paripūrā paṇḍitabhūmīti paṇḍito tīṇi sucaritāni pūretvā sagge nibbattati, tato manussalokaṃ āgacchanto kularūpabhogasampattiyaṃ nibbattati, tattha ṭhito tīṇi ca sucaritāni pūretvā puna sagge nibbattatīti ayaṃ sakalā paripuṇṇā paṇḍitabhūmi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.
10. 《天使经》的注释。巴利
10. Devadūtasuttavaṇṇanā
261 “如是我闻”这句,就是《天使经》。其中“有两种家”等内容,在《马邑经》里已经详细解说了。巴利
261.Evaṃme sutanti devadūtasuttaṃ. Tattha dve agārātiādi assapurasutte vitthāritameva.
262 世尊说法时,有时从地狱开始讲,最后归结到天界;有时从天界开始讲,最后归结到地狱。如果他想详细讲天界的福报,就会简略地提一下地狱之苦、畜生道之苦、饿鬼道之苦,以及人间的福报,然后才详细展开天界的福报。如果他想详细讲地狱之苦,就会简略地提一下天界和人间的福报,以及畜生道和饿鬼道之苦,然后才详细展开地狱之苦。在这部经里,世尊想详细讲地狱之苦,所以从天界开始讲,最后归结到地狱。他简略地讲了天界和人间的福报、畜生道和饿鬼道之苦之后,为了详细讲地狱之苦,便说出了“诸比丘,那些地狱狱卒……”等话。巴利
262.Nirayaṃ upapannāti bhagavā katthaci nirayato paṭṭhāya desanaṃ devalokena osāpeti, katthaci devalokato paṭṭhāya nirayena osāpeti. Sace saggasampattiṃ vitthāretvā kathetukāmo hoti, nirayadukkhaṃ ekadesato katheti, tiracchānayonidukkhaṃ pettivisayadukkhaṃ manussalokasampattiṃ ekadesato katheti, saggasampattimeva vitthāreti. Sace nirayadukkhaṃ vitthāretvā kathetukāmo hoti, devalokamanussalokesu sampattiṃ tiracchānayonipettivisayesu ca dukkhaṃ ekadesato katheti, nirayadukkhameva vitthāreti. So imasmiṃ sutte nirayadukkhaṃ vitthāretukāmo, tasmā devalokato paṭṭhāya desanaṃ nirayena osāpeti. Devalokamanussalokasampattiyo tiracchānayonipettivisayadukkhāni ca ekadesato kathetvā nirayadukkhameva vitthārena kathetuṃ tamenaṃ, bhikkhave, nirayapālātiādimāha.
在这件事上,有些长老说:“所谓地狱卒其实并不存在,就像机器装置一样,只是业本身在制造惩罚。”这种说法在《阿毗达摩》里早就被否定了,经中说:“地狱里到底有没有地狱卒?”
“有的,而且还有行刑者。”就像人世间有执行刑罚的人一样,地狱里也确实有地狱卒。至于阎魔王,他是住在天宫里的鬼王,有时候在天界宫殿中享受天界的如意树、园林、舞女等种种福报,有时候又承受业果,是一位如法的君王。他并不是只有一位,而是四座门各有一位,共四位。他说“没有看见”,是指没有看见任何一个被派到自己面前来的天使。阎魔知道这个人没有领会话里的意思,为了让他领会,就说道:“喂……”等等。巴利
Tattha ekacce therā ‘‘nirayapālā nāma natthi, yantarūpaṃ viya kammameva kāraṇaṃ kāretī’’ti vadanti. Tesaṃ taṃ ‘‘atthi niraye nirayapālāti, āmantā, atthi ca kāraṇikā’’tiādinā nayena abhidhamme (kathā. 866) paṭisedhitameva. Yathā hi manussaloke kammakāraṇakārakā atthi, evameva niraye nirayapālā atthīti. Yamassa raññoti yamarājā nāma vemānikapetarājā, ekasmiṃ kāle dibbavimāne dibbakapparukkhadibbauyyānadibbanāṭakādisampattiṃ anubhavati, ekasmiṃ kāle kammavipākaṃ, dhammiko rājā. Na cesa ekova hoti, catūsu pana dvāresu cattāro janā honti. Nāddasanti attano santike pesitassa kassaci devadūtassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vadati. Atha naṃ yamo ‘‘nāyaṃ bhāsitassa atthaṃ sallakkhetī’’ti ñatvā sallakkhāpetukāmo ambhotiādimāha.
“有生法”是指具有生的本质,还没有从生中解脱,也就是说:生就存在于我自身之内。后面“有老法”等说法,也是同样的道理。巴利
Jātidhammoti jātisabhāvo, aparimutto jātiyā, jāti nāma mayhaṃ abbhantareyeva atthīti. Parato jarādhammotiādīsupi eseva nayo.
263 审问第一个天使这一段,那个婴儿实际上是这样说的:“诸位请看,我也有和你们一样的手脚,却陷在自己的粪尿里。因为自身的法性,我没法自己站起来洗澡,我身体肮脏,连‘帮我洗一洗’都说不出口。因为还没有从生中解脱,所以才成了这样。而且不只是我,你们也一样没有从生中解脱。就像生已经来到我身上,生也会来到你们身上。所以,趁它还没到来,你们要做善事。”正因如此,他成了“天使”。至于这个词的词义,已经在《玛卡迭瓦经》里说过了。巴利
263.Paṭhamaṃ devadūtaṃ samanuyuñjitvāti ettha daharakumāro atthato evaṃ vadati nāma ‘‘passatha, bho, mayhampi tumhākaṃ viya hatthapādā atthi, sake panamhi muttakarīse palipanno, attano dhammatāya uṭṭhahitvā nhāyituṃ na sakkomi, ahaṃ kiliṭṭhagattomhi, nhāpetha manti vattumpi na sakkomi, jātitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jātito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jāti āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto, vacanattho pana maghadevasutte vuttova.
关于第二个天使这一段,这里那个衰老的众生实际上是这样说的:诸位请看,我过去也像你们一样年轻,双腿有力、双臂强壮、行动敏捷。可是那些力量和敏捷在我身上已经消失了。虽然我的手和脚还在,却做不了手脚该做的事,因为我还没有从老中解脱,所以才变成这样。而且不只是我,你们也一样还没有从老中解脱。就像老已经来到我身上,老也会来到你们身上。所以,在它到来之前,你们应当好好行善。正因如此,他被称为天使。巴利
Dutiyaṃdevadūtanti etthāpi jarājiṇṇasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, ahampi tumhe viya taruṇo ahosiṃ ūrubalabāhubalajavanasampanno, tassa me tā balajavanasampattiyo antarahitā, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, jarāyamhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi jarāya aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi jarā āgamissati, iti tassā pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
第三、关于“天使”这一段,这里那个生病的有情其实就是在说:诸位请看,我也曾经像你们一样没有病,如今却被病压倒,陷在自己的屎尿里,连站起来都做不到。虽然我的手和脚都还在,却做不了手脚该做的事,因为我还没有从病中解脱,才变成了这样。而且不只是我,你们也一样还没有从病中解脱。病会像降临到我身上一样,也降临到你们身上,所以趁它还没来,你们应当赶快行善。正因如此,他被称为“天使”。巴利
Tatiyaṃ devadūtanti etthāpi gilānasatto atthato eva vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha, bho, ahampi tumhe viya nirogo ahosiṃ, somhi etarahi byādhinā abhihato sake muttakarīse palipanno, uṭṭhātumpi na sakkomi, vijjamānāpi me hatthapādā hatthapādakiccaṃ na karonti, byādhitomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi byādhito aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākaṃ byādhi āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
265 第四,关于“天使”这一段,在这里,“天使”既可以指刑罚,也可以指行刑者。其中,从刑罚这一方面来说,三十二种刑罚实际上是这样说的:“我们投生的时候,并不是生在树上或石头上,而是生在像你们这样的身体里。所以,在我们还没在你们体内生起之前,你们应当行善。”因此,这些刑罚就被称为“天使”。从行刑者这一方面来说,他们实际上是这样说的:“我们执行这三十二种刑罚时,并不是在树木等东西上执行,而正是在像你们这样的众生身上执行。所以,在我们对你们执行刑罚之前,你们应当行善。”因此,这些行刑者也就被称为“天使”。巴利
265.Catutthaṃ devadūtanti ettha pana kammakāraṇā vā devadūtāti kātabbā kammakāraṇikā vā. Tattha pana kammakāraṇapakkhe bāttiṃsa tāva kammakāraṇā atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma – ‘‘mayaṃ nibbattamānā na rukkhe vā pāsāṇe vā nibbattāma, tumhādisānaṃ sarīre nibbattāma, iti amhākaṃ pure nibbattitova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenete devadūtā nāma jātā. Kammakāraṇikāpi atthato evaṃ vadanti nāma – ‘‘mayaṃ dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā karontā na rukkhādīsu karoma, tumhādisesu sattesuyeva karoma, iti amhākaṃ tumhesu pure kammakāraṇākaraṇatova kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenetepi devadūtā nāma jātā.
266 第五种天使在这里,那个已经死了的众生其实是这样说的:诸位贤者,请看被扔在荒坟里的我,已经变成膨胀、青瘀等样子,正因为还没有从死亡中解脱,才成了这副模样。而且不只是我,你们也一样没有从死亡中解脱。死亡会像降临到我身上一样,也一定会降临到你们身上。所以趁它还没来,你们应当赶快行善。正因如此,他才被称为天使。巴利
266.Pañcamaṃ devadūtanti ettha matakasatto atthato evaṃ vadati nāma – ‘‘passatha bho maṃ āmakasusāne chaḍḍitaṃ uddhumātakādibhāvaṃ pattaṃ, maraṇatomhi aparimuttatāya ediso jāto. Na kho panāhameva, tumhepi maraṇato aparimuttāva. Yatheva hi mayhaṃ, evaṃ tumhākampi maraṇaṃ āgamissati, iti tassa pure āgamanāva kalyāṇaṃ karothā’’ti. Tenesa devadūto nāma jāto.
那么,谁能受到这种天使的审问,谁不能呢?造了大量恶业的人,死后就直接投生到地狱里去。而只造了少量恶业的人,则会受到审问。这就好比抓到一个人赃并获的盗贼,直接就该处置就处置了,根本不会去审判。但如果是经过侦查才抓到的盗贼,就会把他带到审判的地方,这样他才会经历审判。这里的道理也是这样。那些只造了少量恶业的人,有时候自己就能想起来,有时候被人提醒也能想起来。巴利
Imaṃ pana devadūtānuyogaṃ ko labhati, ko na labhatīti? Yena tāva bahuṃ pāpaṃ kataṃ, so gantvā niraye nibbattatiyeva. Yena pana parittaṃ pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, so labhati. Yathā hi sabhaṇḍaṃ coraṃ gahetvā kattabbameva karonti, na vinicchinanti. Anuvijjitvā gahitaṃ pana vinicchayaṭṭhānaṃ nayanti, so vinicchayaṃ labhati. Evaṃsampadametaṃ. Parittapāpakammā hi attano dhammatāyapi saranti, sāriyamānāpi saranti.
在这其中,有一位名叫长胜达米拉的人,凭着自己的法性而回忆起来。据说这位达米罗曾在善意山寺,用一块红布供养了一座空中塔。后来他投生到地狱附近的近边地狱,一听到大火燃烧的呼呼声,就立刻想起自己供养过的那块布,于是转生到了天界。还有另一个人,在给身为年轻比丘的儿子布施一件僧衣时,把衣服放在了儿子脚下。临终时,他以那件衣服发出的沙沙声作为相。他也投生在地狱附近的近边地狱,借着火焰燃烧的声音,想起那件僧衣,便转生到了天界。就是这样,他们凭着自己的法性,忆起善业,从而转生天界。巴利
Tattha dīghajayantadamiḷo nāma attano dhammatāya sari. So kira damiḷo sumanagirivihāre ākāsacetiyaṃ rattapaṭena pūjesi. Atha niraye ussadasāmante nibbatto aggijālasaddaṃ sutvāva attano pūjitapaṭaṃ anussari, so gantvā sagge nibbatto. Aparopi puttassa daharabhikkhuno khalisāṭakaṃ dento pādamūle ṭhapesi, maraṇakālamhi paṭapaṭāti sadde nimittaṃ gaṇhi, sopi ussadasāmante nibbatto jālasaddena taṃ sāṭakaṃ anussaritvā sagge nibbatto. Evaṃ tāva attano dhammatāya kusalaṃ kammaṃ saritvā sagge nibbattatīti.
如果众生不能靠自己的法性想起来,阎魔王就会用五种天使来问他。这里面,有的人被第一种天使一提醒就想起来了,有的人则是靠第二种、第三种等等才想起来。要是五种天使都用了还是想不起来,阎魔王就亲自提醒他。据说有一位大臣,用一瓶须摩那花供养了大塔,然后把功德回向给阎魔王。后来他因为不善业投生到地狱,被带到了阎魔王面前。五种天使都没能让他想起善业时,阎魔王就亲自查看,看到他有过善行,便提醒说:“你当初不是用一瓶须摩那花供养大塔,还把功德回向给我了吗?”他当场就想了起来,随即转生到了天界。但如果阎魔王亲自查看,还是看不到这位众生有任何善行,就会想:“这个众生要受大苦了。”然后便沉默不语。巴利
Attano dhammatāya asarante pana pañca devadūte pucchati. Tattha koci paṭhamena devadūtena sarati, koci dutiyādīhi. Yo pana pañcahipi na sarati, taṃ yamo rājā sayaṃ sāreti. Eko kira amacco sumanapupphakumbhena mahācetiyaṃ pūjetvā yamassa pattiṃ adāsi, taṃ akusalakammena niraye nibbattaṃ yamassa santikaṃ nayiṃsu. Tasmiṃ pañcahipi devadūtehi kusale asarante yamo sayaṃ olokento disvā – ‘‘nanu tvaṃ mahācetiyaṃ sumanapupphakumbhena pūjetvā mayhaṃ pattiṃ adāsī’’ti sāresi, so tasmiṃ kāle saritvā devalokaṃ gato. Yamo pana sayaṃ oloketvāpi apassanto – ‘‘mahādukkhaṃ nāma anubhavissati ayaṃ satto’’ti tuṇhī hoti.
267 “大地狱”指的就是无间大地狱。那它到底有多大呢?里面的长度和宽度都是一百由旬。地面是热铁,顶盖也是热铁,每一面墙都有九由旬厚。从东墙升起的火焰,烧到西墙,穿透西墙之后,还继续向外延伸一百由旬。其余几个方向也是这样。这样按火焰所及的范围来算,长宽均为三百一十八由旬;如果算外围一圈,则是九百五十四由旬;若把四周的附属地狱也算进去,整体一圈就是一万由旬。巴利
267.Mahānirayeti avīcimahānirayamhi. Kiṃ panassa pamāṇaṃ? Abbhantaraṃ āyāmena ca vitthārena ca yojanasataṃ hoti. Lohapathavī lohachadanaṃ ekekā ca bhitti navanavayojanikā hoti. Puratthimāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhitā pacchimaṃ bhittiṃ gahetvā taṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo. Iti jālapariyantavasena āyāmavitthārato aṭṭhārasayojanādhikāni tīṇi yojanasatāni, parikkhepato pana navayojanasatāni catupaṇṇāsayojanāni, samantā pana ussadehi saddhiṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ hoti.
268 “拔出来时还是那样”:这里说的“脚踩下去之后,只要还没站稳,就根本无法用力拔出来”。但这里的意思是:从下面开始被烧,从上面也开始被烧,所以踩下去的时候,脚看起来就是被烧着的样子;往上拔的时候,也还是那样,因此才这么说。“已经过了很久”:是说已经过了许许多多的百年、千年。巴利
268.Ubbhataṃ tādisameva hotīti ettha akkantapadaṃ yāva aṭṭhito daḷhaṃ uddharitumeva na sakkā. Ayaṃ panettha attho – heṭṭhato paṭṭhāya ḍayhati, uparito paṭṭhāya jhāyati, iti akkamanakāle ḍayhamānaṃ paññāyati, uddharaṇakāle tādisameva, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Bahusampattoti bahūni vassasatavassasahassāni sampatto.
这个地狱为什么被称为“无间”呢?所谓“间”,就是指空隙。而在那里,火焰与火焰之间、众生与众生之间、痛苦与痛苦之间,都没有任何空隙。所以它才被称为“无间”。那里东墙升起的火焰相互交织着蔓延一百由旬,穿透西墙之后,又继续向外延伸一百由旬。其余各方也都是同样的情形。巴利
Kasmā panesa narako avīcīti saṅkhaṃ gatoti. Vīci nāma antaraṃ vuccati, tattha ca aggijālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā dukkhassa vā antaraṃ natthi. Tasmā so avīcīti saṅkhaṃ gatoti. Tassa hi puratthimabhittito jālā uṭṭhitā saṃsibbamānā yojanasataṃ gantvā pacchimabhittiṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo.
提婆达多就投生在这六种火焰的中间。他的身体有一百由旬那么大,两只脚一直没入到脚踝,插在热铁地面上;两只手一直没入到手腕,插在热铁墙壁里;头部一直没入到眉毛,插在热铁顶盖中。一根铁矛从下方刺入,穿透他的身体,插进顶盖;从东墙穿出的一根铁矛穿透他的心脏,插进西墙;从北墙穿出的一根铁矛穿透他的肋骨,插进南墙。因为他对如如不动的如来犯了罪,所以自己也变得动弹不得,就在那里受苦——这是业力相似的结果,他才变成这样。由于火焰之间毫无间隙,所以名叫无间。巴利
Imesaṃ channaṃ jālānaṃ majjhe nibbatto devadatto, tassa yojanasatappamāṇo attabhāvo, dve pādā yāva gopphakā lohapathaviṃ paviṭṭhā, dve hatthā yāva maṇibandhā lohabhittiyo paviṭṭhā, sīsaṃ yāva bhamukaṭṭhito lohachadane paviṭṭhaṃ, adhobhāgena ekaṃ lohasūlaṃ pavisitvā kāyaṃ vinivijjhantaṃ chadane paviṭṭhaṃ, pācīnabhittito nikkhantasūlaṃ hadayaṃ vinivijjhitvā pacchimabhittiṃ paviṭṭhaṃ , uttarabhittito nikkhantasūlaṃ phāsukā vinivijjhitvā dakkhiṇabhittiṃ paviṭṭhaṃ. Niccale tathāgatamhi aparaddhattā niccalova hutvā paccatīti kammasarikkhatāya ediso jāto. Evaṃ jālānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci nāma.
而在这地狱内部方圆一百由旬的地方,有情众生密密麻麻、毫无空隙,就像把粉末塞满竹筒一样。不能说“这个地方有众生,那个地方没有众生”。无论是走着的、站着的、坐着的还是躺着的,彼此之间都找不到缝隙;走着的、站着的、坐着的、躺着的,互相之间也不会妨碍。就是这样,因为众生之间毫无间隔,所以叫无间。巴利
Abbhantare panassa yojanasatike ṭhāne nāḷiyaṃ koṭṭetvā pūritapiṭṭhaṃ viya sattā nirantarā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne satto atthi, imasmiṃ natthī’’ti na vattabbaṃ, gacchantānaṃ ṭhitānaṃ nisinnānaṃ nipannānaṃ anto natthi, gacchante vā ṭhite vā nisinne vā nipanne vā aññamaññaṃ na bādhanti. Evaṃ sattānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci.
而在身门,会生起六种与舍受相应的心,以及一种与苦受相应的心。即便如此,就像在舌尖上放六滴蜂蜜,再放一滴熔化的铜汁,由于铜汁灼烧的力量太强,只有那一滴铜汁的感受明显,其余六滴蜂蜜都变得微不足道;同样,由于灼烧的力量太强,在这里只有苦受持续不断,其他感受都微不足道。因为苦受持续不断,所以称为无间。巴利
Kāyadvāre pana cha upekkhāsahagatāni cittāni uppajjanti, ekaṃ dukkhasahagataṃ. Evaṃ santepi yathā jivhagge cha madhubindūni ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ tambalohabindumhi ṭhapite anudahanabalavatāya tadeva paññāyati, itarāni abbohārikāni honti, evaṃ anudahanabalavatāya dukkhamevettha nirantaraṃ, itarāni abbohārikānīti. Evaṃ dukkhassa nirantaratāya avīci.
269 “大”是指身量一百由旬。它掉进那里时,一只脚落在大地狱,另一只脚落在粪屎地狱。“苏奇·目奇”是指嘴巴像针一样细。那些众生的身体,有的像象脖子那么大,有的像一只独木舟那么大。巴利
269.Mahantoti yojanasatiko. So tattha patatīti eko pādo mahāniraye hoti, eko gūthaniraye nipatati. Sūcimukhāti sūcisadisamukhā, te hatthigīvappamāṇā ekadoṇikanāvāppamāṇā vā honti.
煻煨地狱有一百由旬那么大,里面装满了烧得通红的炭灰,堆得像尖顶屋那么高。掉进去的众生,就像犁头、斧子、石头之类的东西被扔进谷壳堆里一样,一直沉到最底层。巴利
Kukkulanirayoti yojanasatappamāṇova anto kūṭāgāramattavitaccitaaṅgārapuṇṇo ādittachārikanirayo, yattha patitapatitā kudrūsakarāsimhi khittaphālavāsisilādīni viya heṭṭhimatalameva gaṇhanti.
他们被逼着往上爬:就是用铁棍抽打,逼他们往上爬。他们往上爬的时候,那些刺朝下;往下走的时候,刺就朝上。巴利
Āropentīti ayadaṇḍehi pothentā āropenti. Tesaṃ ārohanakāle te kaṇṭakā adhomukhā honti, orohanakāle uddhaṃmukhā.
被业力所生的风吹动。也砍断手:就像在砧板上剁肉一样砍断手。如果站起来逃跑,铁墙就会升起围住,下方生出刀刃。巴利
Vāteritānīti kammamayena vātena calitāni. Hatthampi chindantīti phalake maṃsaṃ viya koṭṭayamānāni chindanti. Sace uṭṭhāya palāyati, ayopākāro samuṭṭhahitvā parikkhipati, heṭṭhā khuradhārā samuṭṭhāti.
名叫韦答拉尼的铜河,就是那条“碱水河”。在那条河里,有铁制的粗砂砾和莲花叶,下面是刀锋,两岸长着藤蔓和茅草。那个有情在那里遭受剧烈、粗涩的苦:他在那里被水流上下冲漂,在莲花叶上被割裂;被十字路口形状的粗砂砾尖刺刺穿;被刀锋劈开;在两岸被茅草刮擦;被藤蔓拖拽;被锋利的矛劈裂。巴利
Khārodakā nadīti vetaraṇī nāma tambalohanadī. Tattha ayomayāni kharavālika-pokkharapattāni, heṭṭhā khuradhārā ubhosu tīresu vettalatā ca kusatiṇāni ca. So tattha dukkhā tibbā kharāti so tattha uddhañca adho ca vuyhamāno pokkharapattesu chijjati. Siṅghāṭakasaṇṭhānāya kharavālikāya kaṇṭakehi vijjhiyati, khuradhārāhi phāliyati, ubhosu tīresu kusatiṇehi vilekhati, vettalatāhi ākaḍḍhiyati, tikkhasattīhi phāliyati.
270 狱卒用烧红的铁桩撬开他的嘴。当他说“我饿了”时,狱卒们就把一口大铁锅装满铁丸,抬到他跟前。他知道那是铁丸,便咬紧牙关;狱卒们就用烧红的铁桩撬开他的嘴,把铁丸塞进去。接着,他们又用一口大铜锅盛来熔铜,照样这么做。随后,又把他投入大地狱:也就是说,从五种束缚的刑罚开始,一直到饮熔铜;再从饮熔铜开始,重新施加五种束缚等刑罚,然后把他扔进大地狱。在那里,有的有情只受五种束缚就解脱了,有的受完第二种,有的受完第三种,有的在饮熔铜时解脱;但只要业还没有耗尽,就还会被扔进大地狱。巴利
270.Tattenaayosaṅkunāti tena jigacchitomhīti vutte mahantaṃ lohapacchiṃ lohaguḷānaṃ pūretvā taṃ upagacchanti, so lohaguḷabhāvaṃ ñatvā dante samphuseti, athassa te tattena ayosaṅkunā mukhaṃ vivaranti, tambalohadhārehi mahantena lohakaṭāhena tambalohaṃ upanetvā evamevaṃ karonti. Puna mahānirayeti evaṃ pañcavidhabandhanato paṭṭhāya yāva tambalohapānā tambalohapānato paṭṭhāya puna pañcavidhabandhanādīni kāretvā mahāniraye pakkhipanti. Tattha koci pañcavidhabandhaneneva muccati, koci dutiyena, koci tatiyena, koci tambalohapānena muccati, kamme pana aparikkhīṇe puna mahāniraye pakkhipanti.
有一位年轻比丘在学这部经的时候,说:“尊者,已经受了这么多苦的有情,还要再被扔进大地狱吗?”(回答是:)
“是的,贤友,只要业还没有耗尽,他们就会一次又一次地这样做。”他说:“尊者,先别讲经了,请直接给我讲业处吧。”导师就为他讲了业处,他证得入流果之后,又回来学这部经。在这段经文这里停下来(先修业处)而证得阿拉汉果的人,也多得数不清。而且这部经,是一切佛陀都不曾舍弃的。巴利
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ gaṇhanto eko daharabhikkhu, – ‘‘bhante, ettakaṃ dukkhamanubhavitasattaṃ punapi mahāniraye pakkhipantī’’ti āha. Āma, āvuso, kamme aparikkhīṇe punappunaṃ evaṃ karontīti. Tiṭṭhatu, bhante, uddeso, kammaṭṭhānameva kathethāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathāpetvā sotāpanno hutvā āgamma uddesaṃ aggahesi. Aññesampi imasmiṃ padese uddesaṃ ṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pattānaṃ gaṇanā natthi. Sabbabuddhānañcetaṃ suttaṃ avijahitameva hoti.
271 投生到低劣之身:就是已经投生到低劣的身体里。取:指渴爱和邪见这两种执取。生与死的起因:是生和死的因。无取:不执取四种取。生与死灭尽:在被称为生与死灭尽的涅槃中解脱。巴利
271.Hīnakāyūpagāti hīnakāyaṃ upagatā hutvā. Upādāneti taṇhādiṭṭhigahaṇe. Jātimaraṇasambhaveti jātiyā ca maraṇassa ca kāraṇabhūte. Anupādāti catūhi upādānehi anupādiyitvā. Jātimaraṇasaṅkhayeti jātimaraṇasaṅkhayasaṅkhāte nibbāne vimuccanti.
已经在这当下存在的生命里彻底寂灭:就是在现前这一生中,凭一切烦恼的彻底止息而寂灭。已经超越了一切苦:就是被称为已经越过了一切苦。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammābhinibbutāti diṭṭhadhamme imasmiṃyeva attabhāve sabbakilesanibbānena nibbutā. Sabbadukkhaṃ upaccagunti sabbadukkhātikkantā nāma honti.